Professional Documents
Culture Documents
*
C Copyright 2010 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove read this manual. To protect yourself and
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse, follow the instructions in this manual.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
. Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
2
AWD All-wheel drive Supplemental restraint sys- Power door unlock (turbo
SRS tem
Driver’s control center differ- models)
DCCD ential TIN Tire identification number
DRL Daytime running light Tire pressure monitoring sys- Power door lock and unlock
TPMS tem (non-turbo models)
EBD Electronic brake force distri-
bution VDC Vehicle dynamics control Power window with automatic
open (all models) and close (if
ELR Emergency locking retractor equipped) function
FWD Front-wheel drive
Passengers’ windows lock
GAW Gross axle weight and unlock
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GVW Gross vehicle weight Fuel
Front fog lights Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety
driving considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is
WARNING moving. The passenger cannot
needs enough space for deploy-
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen-
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi-
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control cle.
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in-
dent. move the seat as far back as fants and small children should
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the system which is appropriate for
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
vehicle should always wear seat- read the following sections.
belts when the vehicle is moving. weight. If a child is too big for a
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child
System) airbag does not do away belts” F1-11. should sit in the REAR seat and
with the need to fasten seatbelts. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts.
In combination with the seat- “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
belts, it offers the best combined System airbag)” F1-35. children are safer when properly
protection in case of a serious restrained in the rear seating
accident. positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
Not wearing a seatbelt increases to stand up or kneel on the seat.
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the . Put children aged 12 and under in
vehicle has the SRS airbag. the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
– CONTINUED –
6
The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children, . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
considerable speed and force adults or animals in the vehicle. “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
and can injure or even kill chil- They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-35.
dren, especially if they are 12 themselves or others through
years of age and under and are inadvertent operation of the ve- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon
not restrained or improperly re- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, monoxide)
strained. Because children are temperature in a closed vehicle
lighter and weaker than adults, could quickly become high en- WARNING
their risk of being injured from ough to cause severe or possibly
deployment is greater. fatal injuries to them. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD . Help prevent children, adults or Engine exhaust gas contains
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE animals from locking themselves carbon monoxide, a colorless
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS in the trunk. On hot or sunny and odorless gas which is dan-
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO days, the temperature in the gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE trunk could quickly become high . Always properly maintain the en-
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO enough to cause death or serious gine exhaust system to prevent
THE SRS AIRBAG. heat-related injuries including engine exhaust gas from enter-
. Always turn the child safety locks brain damage to anyone locked ing the vehicle.
to the “LOCK” position when inside, particularly for small chil- . Never run the engine in a closed
children sit in the rear seat. dren. space, such as a garage, except
Serious injury could result if a . When leaving the vehicle, either for the brief time needed to drive
child accidentally opens the door close all windows and lock all the vehicle in or out of it.
and falls out. Refer to “Child doors. Also make certain that the . Avoid remaining in a parked
safety locks” F2-21. trunk is closed. vehicle for a lengthy time while
. Always lock the passenger’s win- the engine is running. If that is
dows using the lock switch when For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
children are riding in the vehicle. read the following sections. lation fan to force fresh air into
Failure to follow this procedure . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the vehicle.
could result in injury to a child belts” F1-11.
. Always keep the front ventilator
operating the power window. Re- . For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves
fer to “Windows” F2-21. “Child restraint systems” F1-21. or other obstructions to ensure
7
that the ventilation system al- & Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that WARNING WARNING
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have t he probl em Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the
checked and corrected as soon dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can
as possible. If you must drive stream delays your reaction time delay your reaction time and impair
under these conditions, drive and impairs your perception, judg- your perception, judgment and at-
only with all windows fully open. ment and attentiveness. If you drive tentiveness. If you drive after taking
after drinking – even if you drink just them, it may increase your, your
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate a little – it will increase the risk of passengers’ and other persons’ risk
closed while driving to prevent being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or
exhaust gas from entering the accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
vehicle. your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with
accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the
severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication
Please don’t drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires
safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with
blood is below the legal limit. The safest your doctor.
thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence
However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you
tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
– CONTINUED –
8
& Driving when tired or sleepy performance problems resulting wish to operate the controls of the
from modification may not be cov- navigation system, first take the
WARNING ered under warranties. vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe place.
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction time will be delayed and & Car phone/cell phone and
your perception, judgment and at- driving & Driving with pets
tentiveness will be impaired. If you Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
drive when tired or sleepy, your, CAUTION driving and distract your attention from
your passengers’ and other per- driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
sons’ chances of being involved in Do not use a car phone/cell phone unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
a serious accident may increase. while driving; it may distract your around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
attention from driving and can lead your passengers. Besides, the pets can
Please do not continue to drive but to an accident. If you use a car be hurt under these situations. It is also for
instead find a safe place to rest if you phone/cell phone, pull off the road their own safety that pets should be
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you and park in a safe place before properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
should make periodic rest stops to refresh using your phone. In some States/ strain a pet with a special traveling
yourself before continuing on your journey. Provinces, only hands-free phones harness which can be secured to the rear
When possible, you should share the may legally be used while driving. seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
driving with others. which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
& Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
with navigation system in the front passenger’s seat. For further
CAUTION information, consult your veterinarian,
WARNING local animal protection society or pet
Your vehicle should not be modified shop.
other than with genuine SUBARU Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do
of modifications could affect its not operate the controls of the
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving.
and may even violate governmental The loss of attention to driving
regulations. In addition, damage or could lead to an accident. If you
9
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Table of contents
– CONTINUED –
14
– CONTINUED –
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-38)
2) Mist (page 3-38)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-39)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-39)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-38)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-36)
7) Light control switch (page 3-31)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-36)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-32)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-32)
11) Turn signal (page 3-33)
– CONTINUED –
18
! U.S.-spec. models (turbo models except STI) 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
2) Tachometer (page 3-9)
3) Speedometer (page 3-8)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-8)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever/gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-26)
7) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
– CONTINUED –
20
– CONTINUED –
22
! Except U.S.-spec. models (turbo models except STI) 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
2) Tachometer (page 3-9)
3) Speedometer (page 3-8)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-8)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-8)
6) Select lever/gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-26)
7) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
23
– CONTINUED –
24
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page AT OIL TEMP warning 3-18 High beam indicator 3-26
light (AT models) light
Seatbelt warning light 3-14 Rear differential oil Front fog light indicator 3-27
temperature warning 3-19 light (if equipped)
light (STI)
Front passenger’s 3-14
seatbelt warning light
ABS warning light 3-21 Security indicator light 3-25
SRS airbag system 3-15
warning light Headlight indicator
Brake system warning 3-21 3-27
light light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 3-16
cator Door open warning Cruise control indica- 3-26
light 3-23 tor light
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 3-16
dicator AWD warning light Cruise control set in- 3-27
(AT models) 3-23 dicator light
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc- 3-16 Hill start assist warn-
tion indicator lamp ing light (if equipped)/ Low fuel warning light 3-22
Hill start assist OFF 3-22
Coolant temperature
low indicator light indicator light (STI) Low tire pressure
(non-turbo models)/ 3-17 Vehicle Dynamics warning light 3-19
Coolant temperature Control operation indi- 3-23 (U.S.-spec. models)
high warning light cator light
(non-turbo models) SPORT mode indica-
Vehicle Dynamics tor light (AT models) 3-25
Control warning light/
Charge warning light 3-18 Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 3-23 Shift-up indicator light 3-26
light/Traction Control (STI)
Oil pressure warning 3-18 OFF indicator light
light (STI) Driver’s control center
differential auto indi- 3-27
Turn signal indicator cator light (STI)
lights 3-26
25
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some
of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-18
doors)
Impact sensor operation (only models with Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-20
shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
Dome light and map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-16
(models with moonroof)
Dome light illumination
(models without moonroof)
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-11
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Remote engine start system Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-12
(dealer option)
Defogger and deicer system for Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-48
models with the automatic climate defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation
control system
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2, 6-3
delay timer
Map light for models with a moonroof
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-5
27
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2 Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-19
Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-3 System monitors ............................................... 1-20
Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-3 System servicing ............................................... 1-20
Seat cushion height adjustment (driver’s seat) ..... 1-4 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-21
Head restraint adjustment (if equipped)................ 1-4 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-21
Active head restraint (if equipped) ....................... 1-5 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-22
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-24
Type A seat heater .............................................. 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Type B seat heater .............................................. 1-6 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-24
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-27
Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-8 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8 lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9 Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-31
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-11 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-11
System airbag)................................................ 1-35
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-12 Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor window-side rear passengers........................... 1-35
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-12
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-39
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-12
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-49
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-12
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-55
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-19
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-57
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-57
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
restraint device or in a seatbelt, & Forward and backward ad- & Reclining the seatback
whichever is appropriate for the justment
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
restrained in the rear seating posi- Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to seatback to the desired position. Then
tions than in the front seating posi- the desired position. Then release the release the lever and make sure the
tions. For instructions and precau- lever and try to move the seat back and seatback is securely locked into place.
tions concerning child restraint sys- forth to make sure that it is securely locked The seatback placed in a reclined position
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- into place. can spring back upward with force when
tems” F1-21. the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
– CONTINUED –
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Seat cushion height adjust- & Head restraint adjustment (if
ment (driver’s seat) equipped)
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid- 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat 1) Head restraint
is lowered. 2) Release button
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
a collision, always put the seatback rises. Both the driver’s seat and the front
in the upright position while the passenger’s seat are equipped with head
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not The height of the seat can be adjusted by restraints.
place objects such as cushions moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
The head restraint should be adjusted so
between the passenger and the up and down.
that the center of the head restraint is
seatback. If you do so, the risk of closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen To raise:
will increase, and both can result in Pull the head restraint up.
serious internal injury or death. To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
Seat heater (if equipped) & Type A seat heater To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
The seat heater is equipped in the front depending on the temperature.
seats. Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
position. opposite side of the current position.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
1) HI – Rapid heating
can cause battery discharge.
2) LO – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off Each seat heater has four levels of
A) Left-hand side adjustment. To use the heater in the
B) Right-hand side right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
– CONTINUED –
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Armrest (if equipped) & Head restraint adjustment ! Rear windows side seating position
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge you must reinstall all head re- 1) Head restraint
of the armrest. straints to protect vehicle occu- 2) Release button
pants.
To remove:
WARNING . All occupants, including the dri-
While pressing the release button, pull out
ver, should not operate a vehicle
To avoid the possibility of serious the head restraint.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
injury, passengers must never be head restraints are placed in their To install:
allowed to sit on the center armrest proper positions in order to mini- Install the head restraint into the holes that
while the vehicle is in motion. mize the risk of neck injury in the are located on the top of the seatback until
event of a crash. the head restraint locks.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the click position.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
release strap and then fold the seatback In this case, perform the following steps to
down. fold the seatback down again.
To return the seatback to its original 1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Trunk lid
position, raise the seatback until it locks (4-door)” F2-25.
into place and make sure that it is securely 2. Access the lock release strap from the
locked. trunk, and fold the seatback forward while
You can keep the seatbacks locked when pulling the strap down.
you leave your vehicle and valet key at a
parking facility. ! 5-door models
1. Lower the head restraints.
tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR)
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must When the child restraint system is re-
be taken to securely place the lap belt as The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt
low as possible on the hips and not on the Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor mode.
restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the
place the shoulder belt under the child’s impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
arm or behind the child’s back. out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt”
! Expectant mothers & Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-24.
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
Retractor normally functions as an Emer- chime” F3-14.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint WARNING
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even . Never use a belt that is twisted or
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in reversed. In an accident, this can
that position and the seatbelt cannot be increase the risk or severity of
Expectant mothers also need to use the
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks injury.
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
will be heard which indicate the retractor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt . Keep the lap belt as low as
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
should be worn securely and as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
possible over the hips, not over the waist. sion, this spreads the force of the
When securing a child restraint system on lap belt over stronger hip bones
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, instead of across the weaker
the seatbelt must be changed over to the abdomen.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING
until you hear a click. belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on The shoulder belt anchor height should be
the shoulder belt. adjusted to the position best suited for the
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
on your hips, not on your waist. anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor Push the button on the buckle.
down.
Before closing the door, make sure that
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid
it is locked in place. catching the belt webbing in the door.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 3. After confirming that the webbing is not 4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the connector (tongue) into the center seatbelt buckle marked
insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click clicks.
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits is heard.
inside.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
battery acid. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
up the seatbelt too quickly.
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
Otherwise, the metal tongue . Never attempt to make modifica- activated in the event of an accident
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent involving a moderate to severe frontal
resulting in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop- collision.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are The pretensioner sensor also serves as
neatly stored. A hanging tongue the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the
plate can swing and hit against sensor detects a certain predetermined
the trim during driving, causing amount of force during a frontal collision,
damage to the trim. the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in
by the retractor to take up the slack so that
the belt more effectively restrains the front
seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
– CONTINUED –
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
small amount of smoke will be released. . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to
These occurrences are normal and not bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU
fire in the vehicle. as soon as possible. dealer.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been you to explain to the buyer that it has
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the & System monitors
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not buyer to the contents of this section.
be pulled out and retracted and therefore A diagnostic system continually monitors
must be replaced. the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
WARNING while the vehicle is being driven. The
NOTE seatbelt pretensioners share the control
. To obtain maximum protection, module with the SRS airbag system.
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
the occupants should sit in an Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
signed to activate in minor frontal
upright position with their seat- seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
belts properly fastened. Refer to system warning light will illuminate. For
roll-over accidents.
“Seatbelts” F1-11. details, refer to “SRS airbag system
. The driver’s seat and passenger’s
seat pretensioners and frontal SRS . Do not modify, remove or strike monitors” F1-55.
airbag operate simultaneously. the front seatbelt retractor as-
. Pretensioners are designed to func- semblies or surrounding area. & System servicing
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the This could result in accidental
event that a pretensioner is activated, activation of the seatbelt preten- WARNING
both the driver’s and front passenger’s sioners or could make the sys-
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be tem inoperative, possibly result- . When discarding a seatbelt re-
replaced only by an authorized ing in serious injury. Seatbelt tractor assembly or scrapping
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- pretensioners have no user-ser- the entire vehicle damaged by a
belt retractor assemblies, use only viceable parts. For required ser- collision, consult your SUBARU
genuine SUBARU parts. vicing of front seatbelt retractors dealer.
. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- . Tampering with or disconnecting
retract or cannot be pulled out due to s i o n e r s, s e e y o u r n e a r e s t the system’s wiring could result
a malfunction or activation of the SUBARU dealer. in accidental activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt seatbelt pretensioner and/or
dealer as soon as possible. retractor assemblies or scrap- SRS airbag or could make the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
system inoperative, which may & Precautions against vehicle Child restraint systems
result in serious injury. Do not modification
use electrical test equipment on Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
any circuit related to the seatbelt you want to install any accessory parts to
pretensioner and SRS airbag your vehicle.
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, con- CAUTION
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er. Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
CAUTION of the seatbelt pretensioners.
The front sub sensors are located . Attachment of any equipment
on both the right and left sides at the (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
front of the vehicle, and the SRS skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to Infants and small children should always
airbag control module including the
the front end. be placed in an infant or child restraint
impact sensors is located under the
system in the rear seat while riding in the
center console. If you need service . Modification of the suspension
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
or repair in those areas or near the system or front end structure.
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
front seatbelt retractors, have the . Installation of a tire of different Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
work performed by your authorized size and construction from the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
SUBARU dealer. tires specified on the vehicle patible with your vehicle and is appro-
placard attached to the driver’s priate for the child’s age and size. All child
NOTE door pillar or specified for indivi- restraint systems are designed to be
dual vehicle models in this Own- secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
If the front part of the vehicle is er’s Manual.
damaged in an accident to the extent the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not (except those described in “Installation of
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer child restraint systems by use of lower and
as soon as possible. tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-29).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
– CONTINUED –
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
properly secured in the vehicle. When child from injury in a collision, or in an accident and can be injured
installing the child restraint system, care- because the child will be caught seriously.
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. between the passenger and objects Additionally, children standing up or
inside the vehicle. kneeling on or in front of the front
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your seat are exposed another serious
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
seating positions. that child to another serious danger. ploys with considerable speed and
Since the SRS airbag deploys with force, the child could be injured or
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the even killed.
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is & Where to place a child re-
moving. straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
A: Front passenger’s seat In this seating position, you should use For that reason, be sure to secure
You should not install a child restraint only a child restraint system that has a ALL types of child restraint devices
system (including a booster seat) due to bottom base that fits snugly against the (including forward facing child
the hazard to children posed by the contours of the seat cushion and can be seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
passenger’s airbag. securely retained using the seatbelt. You should choose a restraint de-
If it is unavoidable to install a child vice which is appropriate for the
B: Rear seat, window-side seating restraint system in the rear seat’s center child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
positions seating position, lower the center head cording to accident statistics, chil-
Recommended positions for all types of restraint to the lowest position and install dren are safer when properly re-
child restraint systems. the child restraint system by correctly strained in the rear seating posi-
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency passing the rear center seatbelt through tions than in the front seating posi-
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and the belt guide. tions.
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system. WARNING
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection Put children aged 12 and under in
of the seat cushion. the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
In this seating position, you should use
with considerable speed and force
only a child restraint system that has a
and can injure or even kill children,
bottom base that fits snugly against the
especially if they are 12 years of age
contours of the seat cushion and can be
and under and are not restrained or
securely retained using the seatbelt.
improperly restrained. Because chil-
C: Rear seat, center seating position dren are lighter and weaker than
Installing a child restraint system is not adults, their risk of being injured
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- from deployment is greater.
belt and an upper anchorage (tether
anchorage) (except in Latin American WARNING
models) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
able to be secured firmly due to projection EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
of the seat cushion. SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
R E A R WA R D FA C I N G C H I L D
– CONTINUED –
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- looking for the label on the child restraint CAUTION
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS system or the manufacturer’s statement of
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO compliance in the document attached to When you install a child restraint
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE the system. system, follow the manufacturer’s
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO Also it is important for you to make sure instructions supplied with it. After
THE SRS AIRBAG. that the child restraint system is compa- installing the child restraint system,
tible with the vehicle in which it will be check to ensure that it is held
used. securely in position. If it is not held
& Choosing a child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
system & Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the
tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child
. Child restraint systems and seat- restraint
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Choose a child restraint system that is Unsecured child restraint sys-
appropriate for the child’s age and size tems can be thrown around in-
(weight and height) in order to provide the side of the vehicle in a sudden
child with proper protection. The child stop, turn or accident; they can
restraint system should meet all applic- strike and injure vehicle occu-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- pants as well as result in serious
1. Place the child restraint system in the
cle Safety Standards for the United States injuries or death to the child.
rear seating position.
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract
child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the
by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. and then tightening the seatbelt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING
retractor to change the retractor over from to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
clicks will be heard which indicate the TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
retractor functions as ALR. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before having a child sit in the child
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt.
clicks will be heard which indicate the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
1. Place the child restraint system in the properly functioning).
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
4-door models 5-door models (type B)
& Installing a booster seat
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top WARNING
tether anchorage and tighten the top
tether. For additional instructions, refer to . Child restraint systems and seat-
“Top tether anchorages” F1-31. belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
5-door models (type A)
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
– CONTINUED –
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
injuries or death to the child. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through increase the risk or severity of
or around the booster seat and the child injury to the child.
following the instructions provided by its . Never place the shoulder belt
CAUTION manufacturer. under the child’s arm or behind
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle the child’s back. If an accident
When you install a child restraint until you hear a click. Take care not to
system, follow the manufacturer’s occurs, this can increase the risk
twist the seatbelt. or severity of injury to the child.
instructions supplied with it. After
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned . The seatbelt should fit snugly in
installing the child restraint system,
across the center of child’s shoulder and order to provide full restraint.
check to ensure that it is held
that the lap belt is positioned as low as Loose fitting belts are not as
securely in position. If it is not held
possible on the child’s hips. effective in preventing or redu-
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the cing injury.
event of an accident may be in- . Place the lap belt as low as
creased. possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
4. To remove the booster seat, press the shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and result in neck injury during sud-
allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
restraint system in your vehicle. anchorages (bars) and two or three upper
Unsecured child restraint sys- anchorages (tether anchorages) for ac-
tems can be thrown around in- commodating such child restraint sys-
side of the vehicle in a sudden tems.
stop, turn or accident; they can Some types of child restraint systems can
strike and injure vehicle occu- be installed on the rear seat of your
pants as well as result in serious vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
injuries or death to the child. child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
CAUTION chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
When you install a child restraint Tethers for CHildren).
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
– CONTINUED –
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
installing a child restraint system only on 1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two
the rear seat window-side seating posi- lower anchorages (bars) for the position
tions. For each window-side seating posi- where you want to install the child restraint
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. system.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
– CONTINUED –
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
– CONTINUED –
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
Always remove the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Otherwise,
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
4-door models 5-door models (type B)
3. Attach the child restraint top tether
hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
– CONTINUED –
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
ment, the driver should always positions than in the front seat-
sit upright and well back in the
WARNING ing positions.
seat as far from the steering . Put children aged 12 and under in For instructions and precautions
wheel as practical while still the rear seat properly restrained concerning the child restraint
maintaining full vehicle control at all times. The SRS airbag system, refer to “Child restraint
and the front passenger should deploys with considerable speed systems” F1-21.
move the seat as far back as and force and can injure or even
possible and sit upright and well . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
kill children, especially if they are FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
back in the seat. 12 years of age and under and FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
. Do not place any objects over or are not restrained or improperly SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
near the SRS airbag cover or restrained. Because children are THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
between you and the SRS airbag. lighter and weaker than adults, CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
If the SRS airbag deploys, those their risk of being injured from THE SRS AIRBAG.
objects could interfere with its deployment is greater.
proper operation and could be . Never allow a child to stand up,
For that reason, we strongly or to kneel on the front passen-
propelled inside the vehicle and recommend that ALL children
cause injury. ger’s seat, or never hold a child
(including those in child seats on your lap or in your arms. The
and those that have outgrown SRS airbag deploys with consid-
child restraint devices) sit in the erable force and can injure or
REAR seat properly restrained at even kill the child.
all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt, whichever
is appropriate for the child’s age, CAUTION
height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re- . When the SRS airbag deploys,
straint devices (including for- some smoke will be released.
ward facing child seats) in the This smoke could cause breath-
REAR seats at all times. ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
According to accident statistics, breathing trouble. If you or your
children are safer when properly passengers have breathing pro-
restrained in the rear seating blems after SRS airbag deploys,
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Airbag control module (including impact 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
sensors) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
NOTE . Do not apply any strong impact to the
The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- . Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
sioner are not controlled by the ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- immediately.
tem. . Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag . Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator senger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
the severity of impact. la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
The total load on the seat is monitored by . The front passenger’s seat must not be
WARNING the occupant detection system’s weight used with the head restraint removed.
sensor located under the seat.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not leave any article including a
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- The system has another sensor that child restraint system on the front passen-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the monitors the tension of the front passen- ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
SRS airbag deploys, those objects ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and buckle engaged when you leave your
could become projectiles that could seatbelt tension data from the sensors, vehicle.
seriously injure vehicle occupants. the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal . Do not place a magnet near the
airbag should or should not be inflated. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag The occupant detection system may not . Do not use front seats with their back-
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal ward-forward position and seatback not
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal being locked into place securely. If any of
different ways depending on the severity airbag deploys. This is normal. them are not locked securely, adjust them
of impact. again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
Observe the following precautions. Failure “Front seats” F1-2.
Have the system inspected by your to do so may prevent the SUBARU
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS advanced frontal airbag system from If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
airbag system warning light illuminates. functioning correctly or cause the system passenger’s occupant detection system
to fail. have failed, the SRS airbag system
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
warning light will illuminate. Have the follows.) seated in the REAR seat. This is
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- . The seat is equipped with a forward because children sitting in the front
er immediately if the SRS airbag system facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or
warning light illuminates. child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
may affect the proper function of the . The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. seat and a small child is in the booster place for children.
Have your vehicle inspected at your seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
SUBARU dealer. . The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following
NOTE mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, the load on the front passenger’s seat,
. The seat is occupied by a child who
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- activating the front passenger’s SRS
has outgrown a child restraint system
tensioner are not controlled by the frontal airbag even though that seat is
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- occupied by a child.
small adult.
tem. . Do not place any article on the seat
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
other than the child occupant and a child
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and tion system is malfunctioning.
restraint system.
OFF indicators
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag the seat.
ON and OFF indicators” F3-16. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a
! Conditions in which front passen- CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback.
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the
activated FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
will not be activated when any of the sure to install it in the REAR seat in place his/her hands or legs on the front
following conditions are met regarding the a correct manner. Also, it is strongly passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
front passenger’s seat: recommended that any forward fa- pull the seatback.
cing child seat or booster seat be
. The seat is empty.
installed in the REAR seat, and that
. The seat is equipped with a rearward even children who have outgrown a
facing child restraint system and an infant child restraint system be also
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
! If the front passenger’s frontal air- sition and seatback of front passenger’s above have been taken, seat the child/
bag ON indicator illuminates and the seat are locked into place securely by small adult in the rear seat and im-
OFF indicator turns off even when moving the seat back and forth. mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
an infant or a small child is in a child for an inspection. Even if the system
restraint system (including booster If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is
seat) while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” scribed above, relocate the child restraint
position if the front passenger’s frontal rear seat.
system to the rear seat and immediately
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child
OFF indicator turns off even when an inspection. restraint system should always wear the
infant or a small child is in a child restraint seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
system (including booster seat). Remove NOTE is deactivated or activated.
the child restraint system from the seat. By When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen-
referring to the child restraint manufac- restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
turer’s recommendations as well as the seated in the front passenger’s seat,
child restraint system installation proce- The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon
dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-21, system may or may not activate the
correctly install the child restraint system. impact when any of the following condi-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag tions are met regarding the front passen-
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” depending on the occupant’s seating
position and make sure that the front ger’s seat.
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the
the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
seat other than the child restraint system . Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat,
and the child occupant. the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
. Ensure that there is no article left in the frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
seatback pocket. is occupied by an adult.
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- despite the fact that the actions noted . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
lift the front passenger’s seat cushion books, shoes, or other objects trapped the following SUBARU distributors.
using his/her feet. under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat. <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
. Do not place any article under the front of Columbia>
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
from behind and under the seat. This may sition and seatback of front passenger’s Subaru of America, Inc.
lift the seat cushion. seat are locked into place securely by Customer Dealer Services Department
. Do not squeeze any article between moving the seat back and forth. P.O. Box 6000
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/ . Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
pillar, door or center console box. This “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
may lift the seat cushion. the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator illuminates and the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
indicator turns off even when the indicator remains off. HI 96819
front passenger’s seat is occupied 808-839-2273
by an adult If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
This can be caused by the adult incor- ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” dealer for an inspection.
position. Ask the front passenger to set 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
the seatback to the upright position, sit up ! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
straight in the center of the seat cushion, for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
Trebol Motors
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition Changing or moving any parts of the front
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
indicator remains illuminated while the ON front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910
indicator remains off, take the following panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828
actions. steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
position. SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the
. Ensure that there are no articles, you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The SRS airbag can function only when After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- components can be very hot as a
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s result of deployment.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag vision is not obstructed. The time required
system is designed to determine the from detecting impact to the deflation of The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
activation or deactivation condition of the the SRS airbag after deployment is short- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag er than the blink of an eye. signed to deploy in the event of an
depending on the total load on the front accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
passenger’s seat monitored by the front frontal collision. It is basically not designed
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s occupant detection system to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
weight sensor. For this reason, only the cause the necessary protection can be
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time.
the event of a collision, but this does not are basically not designed to deploy in
mean failure of the system. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
airbag would activate in a non-accident dents because deployment of only the
If the front sub sensors and the impact situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
sensors in the airbag control module will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
detect a predetermined amount of force and will not interfere with the driver’s would not help the occupant in those
during a frontal collision, the control ability to maintain control of the vehicle. situations. The driver’s and front passen-
module sends signals to the airbag ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
module(s) (only driver’s module or both When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis.
driver’s and front passenger’s modules) fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
instructing the module(s) to inflate the some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the
SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
dual stage inflators. a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
The two inflators of each airbag are another, and it may have no bearing on
triggered either sequentially or simulta- CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
neously, depending on the severity of itself.
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS Do not touch the SRS airbag system
frontal airbag and depending on the components around the steering
severity of impact and the total load on wheel and dashboard with bare
the seat in the case of the front passen- hands right after deployment. Doing
ger’s SRS frontal airbag. so can cause burns because the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
! Example of accident in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- in which it is possible that the both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the
likely deploy. ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
ploy. undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag and SRS
in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its curtain airbag
front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar.
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession, WARNING
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are The SRS side airbag and SRS
activated on the first impact, it/they will not curtain airbag are designed as only
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
be activated on the second impact. a supplement to the primary protec-
frontal airbags are designed basically not
tion provided by the seatbelt. They
– CONTINUED –
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
do not do away with the need to if your head or other parts of the
fasten seatbelts. It is also important body are too close to the SRS
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid side airbag.
injuries that can result when an . Since your vehicle is equipped
occupant is not seated in a proper with SRS curtain airbags, do not
upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms and hands out of the win-
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on
each side of the cabin is stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear
seat), and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than WARNING
the blink of an eye) in the event of Do not rest your arm on either front
a side impact. However, the force door or its internal trim. It could be
of its deployment may cause injured in the event of SRS side
injuries if your head is too close airbag deployment.
to it.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS side airbag
deployment may cause injuries
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the
strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
any passenger’s seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the
side window or put their head, vehicle’s occupants and cause
arms and hands out of the win- injuries.
dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to
airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win-
her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other
curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– CONTINUED –
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the ! Example of the type of accident in
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear which the SRS side airbag and SRS
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns curtain airbag will most likely de-
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be ploy.
an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
slowly deflates. airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. It is basically
airbag deploy even when no one occupies not designed to deploy in a lesser side
the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, it is basically not designed to
applied. deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
When the SRS side airbag and SRS SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud deployment would not help the occupant
inflation noise will be heard and some in those situations.
smoke will be released. These occur- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
rences are a normal result of the deploy- airbag are designed to function on a one- A severe side impact near the front seat
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire time-only basis. activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
in the vehicle. curtain airbag.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
CAUTION deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
Do not touch the SRS side airbag ment during a side impact collision. That
system components around the level differs from one type of collision to
front seat seatback with bare hands another, and it may have no bearing on
right after deployment. Doing so can the visible damage done to the vehicle
cause burns because the compo- itself.
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- & SRS airbag system monitors
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
Turbo models
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag
ary).
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& SRS airbag system servicing . Under the center console the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
. On both the right and left sides at driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
WARNING the front of the vehicle frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
. When discarding an airbag mod- . Steering wheel and column and cover over the front passenger’s SRS
ule or scrapping the entire vehi- nearby areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
cle damaged by a collision, con- . Top of the dashboard on front the front pillar to a point over the rear
sult your SUBARU dealer. passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
. The SRS airbag has no user- areas wise damaged.
serviceable parts. Do not use . Each front seat and nearby area . Center pillar, rear wheel house or
electrical test equipment on any rear sub frame, or an area near these
. Inside each center pillar
circuit related to the SRS airbag parts, was involved in an accident in
. In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
system. For required servicing of
pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- . Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front
ing with or disconnecting the and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
system’s wiring could result in side damaged.
accidental inflation of the SRS . Under the rear center seat . The rear part of the vehicle was
airbag or could make the system involved in an accident in which no
inoperative, which may result in In the event that the SRS airbag is SRS airbag was deployed.
serious injury. deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author- & Precautions against vehicle
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- modification
CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU WARNING
If you need service or repair in areas parts.
indicated in the following list, have
To avoid accidental activation of the
the work performed by an author- NOTE system or rendering the system
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your inoperative, which may result in
bag control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. serious injury, no modifications
and airbag modules are stored in . The front part of the vehicle was should be made to any components
these areas. involved in an accident in which only or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and driver’s door lock. You can keep the Immobilizer
trunk and glove box locked when you
leave your vehicle and valet key at a
parking facility. CAUTION
CAUTION FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
Do not attach a large key holder or
pressly approved by the party re-
key case to either key. If it bangs
sponsible for compliance could void
against your knees while you are
the user’s authority to operate the
driving, it could turn the ignition
equipment.
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby The immobilizer system is designed to
stopping the engine. prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
1) Master key (Black) with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
2) Submaster key (Black)
& Key number plate be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
3) Valet key (Gray) The key number is stamped on the key an unregistered key fits into the ignition
4) Key number plate number plate attached to the key set. switch and can be turned to the “START”
5) Security ID plate Write down the key number and keep it in position, the engine will automatically stop
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This after several seconds.
Three types of keys are provided for your
number is needed to make a replacement
vehicle: Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
Master key, submaster key and valet key. vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-3. ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
The master key and submaster key fit all
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
locks on your vehicle.
position, the transponder transmits the
. Ignition switch key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
. Driver’s door receiver. If the transmitted ID code
. Trunk lid release lever (4-door) matches the ID code registered in the
. Glove box immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
The valet key fits only the ignition switch transmitted and acted upon almost in-
Keys and doors 2-3
stantly, the immobilizer system does not windows and the moonroof, and lock integrated unit, and combination meter.
impede normal starting of the engine. the doors and rear gate.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key . Do not leave spare keys or any & Security indicator light
once before trying again. Refer to “Ignition record of your key number in the
vehicle. Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-25.
switch” F3-3.
This device complies with Part 15 of & Key replacement
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC & Security ID plate
Your key number plate and security ID
Rules. Operation is subject to the plate will be required if you ever need a
following two conditions: (1) this de- replacement key made. Any new key must
vice may not cause harmful interfer- be registered for use with your vehicle’s
ence, and (2) this device must accept immobilizer system before it can be used.
any interference received, including Up to four keys can be registered for use
interference that may cause undesired with one vehicle.
operation. For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
CAUTION have their ID codes erased and re-
. Do not place the key under direct registered when a new key is made.
sunlight or anywhere it may Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
become hot. be presented when a new key is regis-
1) Key number plate
tered. Any key that is not re-registered
. Do not get the key wet. If the key when a new key is made cannot be used
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth 2) Security ID plate
after the other keys are re-registered. For
immediately. The security ID is stamped on the security information on replacement keys and on
ID plate attached to the key set. Write the registration of keys with your immo-
NOTE down the security ID and keep it in bilizer system, contact your SUBARU
another safe place, not in the vehicle. dealer.
To protect your vehicle from theft, This number is needed to make a replace-
please pay close attention to the fol- ment key if you lose your key or lock it NOTE
lowing security precautions: inside the vehicle. A vehicle that is equipped with the
. Never leave your vehicle unattended This number is also needed for replace- remote engine start system as a dealer
with its keys inside. ment or repair of the engine control unit, option can register up to three keys for
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
– CONTINUED –
2-4 Keys and doors
All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door) can ! Behavior with key lock-in preven- NOTE
be locked and unlocked by the power door tion function non-operational When leaving the vehicle, make sure
locking switches located at the driver’s . If the lock lever is turned to the rear you are holding the key before locking
side and the front passenger’s side doors. (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door the doors.
To lock the doors, push the front side of open and the driver’s door is then closed
the switch. with the lock lever in that position, the
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of driver’s door is locked.
the switch. . If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
When you close the doors after you set vehicle, the door is locked.
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
NOTE tional setting can be changed as follows.
Make sure that you do not leave the key . Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
inside the vehicle before locking the gation system:
doors from the outside using the power The setting can be changed using the
door locking switches. navigation monitor. For details, please
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
& Key lock-in prevention func- for the navigation system. Also, the setting
tion can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
This function prevents the doors from Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
being locked with the key still in the . Models without genuine SUBARU
ignition switch. navigation system:
The setting can be changed by a
! Behavior with key lock-in preven- SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
tion function operational dealer for details.
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
2-8 Keys and doors
Remote keyless entry system responsible for compliance will vary depending on environmental
could void the user’s authority conditions. The system’s operable dis-
to operate the equipment. tance will be shorter in areas near a
CAUTION facility or electronic equipment emitting
This device complies with Part 15 of strong radio waves such as a power plant,
. Do not expose the remote trans- the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
mitter to severe shocks, such as Rules. Operation is subject to the controller of home electronic appliances.
those experienced as a result of following two conditions: (1) this de-
dropping or throwing. The remote keyless entry system does not
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
operate when the key is inserted in the
. Do not take the remote transmit- ence, and (2) this device must accept
ignition switch.
ter apart except when replacing any interference received, including
the battery. interference that may cause undesired
. Do not get the remote transmitter operation.
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with Two transmitters are provided for your
a cloth immediately. vehicle.
. When you carry the remote trans-
The remote keyless entry system has the
mitter on an airplane, do not
following functions.
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
When any button of the remote rear gate on the 5-door) without a key
transmitter is pressed, radio . Unlocking the rear gate on the 5-door
waves are sent and may affect without a key
the operation of the airplane. . Opening the trunk lid on the 4-door
When you carry the remote trans- without a key : Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button
mitter in a bag on an airplane, . Sounding a panic alarm : Unlock/disarm button
take measures to prevent the . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- : Lock/arm button
buttons of the remote transmitter A: Panic button
tem. For detailed information, refer to
from being pressed. “Alarm system” F2-16. 1) Front
. FCC WARNING 2) Back
The operable distance of the remote
Changes or modifications not keyless entry system is approximately 30
expressly approved by the party feet (10 meters). However, this distance
Keys and doors 2-9
NOTE & Locking the doors & Unlocking the doors
. The turn signal lights will flash once/
twice under the following conditions.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When opening the trunk lid (4-
door models)
– When unlocking the rear gate (5-
door models)
. The setting of the turn signal light
operation can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
the genuine SUBARU navigation sys-
tem, the setting can be changed using Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
the navigation system. For details, rear gate (5-door). An electronic chirp will door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
please refer to the Owner’s Manual sound once and the turn signal lights will and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
supplement for the navigation system. flash once. To unlock all doors and the rear gate (5-
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk door), briefly press the “ ” button a
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp second time within 5 seconds.
will sound five times and the turn signal
lights will flash five times to alert you that NOTE
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are If the interval between the first and
not properly closed. When you close the second presses of the “ ” button (for
door, it will automatically lock and then an unlocking of all of the doors and the
electronic chirp will sound once and the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
turn signal lights will flash once. tem may not respond.
– CONTINUED –
2-10 Keys and doors
& Opening the trunk lid/un- & Vehicle finder function & Sounding a panic alarm
locking rear gate Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote A “PANIC” button is located on the back of
transmitter. the transmitter.
! 4-door models
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button button once.
is pressed continuously for at least 2
seconds. An electronic chirp will sound The horn will sound and the turn signal
twice and the turn signal lights will flash lights will flash.
twice. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
! 5-door models button on the remote transmitter is
Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
gate. after approximately 30 seconds.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
Keys and doors 2-11
& Selecting audible signal op- & Replacing the battery To replace the battery:
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will CAUTION
give you an audible signal when the doors
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
or in the transmitter when repla-
the audible signal off.
cing the battery.
Do the following to deactivate the audible
signal. You can also use the same steps . Be careful not to damage the
to restore the function. printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate. . Be careful not to allow children to
2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side touch the battery and any re-
of the power door locking switch. moved parts; children could
swallow them.
3. While holding down the REAR (UN- 1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-
LOCK) side of the power door locking . There is a danger of explosion if
head screwdriver.
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into an incorrect replacement battery
the ignition switch at least 6 times within is used. Replace only with the
10 seconds after Step 2. same or equivalent type of bat-
4. Open and close the driver’s door once tery.
within 10 seconds after Step 3. . Batteries should not be exposed
5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to to excessive heat such as sun-
indicate completion of the setting. shine, fire or the like.
You may have the above settings done by When the transmitter battery begins to get
your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models weak, transmitter range will begin to
with the genuine SUBARU navigation decrease. Replace the battery as soon
system, the setting can be changed using as possible.
the navigation monitor. For details, please
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the navigation system. 2. Remove the old battery from the
holder.
– CONTINUED –
2-12 Keys and doors
Alarm system rear gate/trunk lid is closed while the horn “Disarming the system” F2-19.
is sounding, the horn will stop sounding 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
The alarm system helps to protect your with a delay of up to 30 seconds. doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn The alarm is triggered by: 5-door).
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
someone attempts to break into your . Opening any of the doors, the rear gate
or trunk lid position.
vehicle. The starter motor is also inter- 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
rupted to prevent starting the vehicle . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models with shock of the driver’s power door locking switch,
without a key. open the driver’s door within the following
sensors (dealer option))
The system can be armed and disarmed 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
with the remote transmitter. NOTE releasing the switch. The setting will then
The alarm system can be set to trigger be changed as follows.
The system does not operate when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch. the illumination of the following interior If the system was previously activated:
lights. The odometer/trip meter screen displays
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
. Dome light (illuminates only when “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
for activation at the time of shipment from
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” indicating that the system is now deacti-
the factory. You can set the system for
position) vated.
deactivation yourself or have it done by
. Map lights (models with moonroof) If the system was previously deacti-
your SUBARU dealer.
The notifications regarding the dome vated:
& System operation light and the map lights are deactivated The odometer/trip meter screen displays
The alarm system will sound the following as the factory setting. A SUBARU “AL on” and the horn sounds once,
alarms when triggered. dealer can activate the system. Contact indicating that the system is now acti-
your SUBARU dealer for details. vated.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds. NOTE
. The turn signal lights will flash for 30 & Activating and deactivating You may have the above setting
seconds. the alarm system change done by your SUBARU dealer.
If any of the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid To change the setting of your vehicle’s
remains open after the 30-second period, alarm system for activation or deactiva-
the horn will continue to sound for a tion, do the following.
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door or the 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
Keys and doors 2-17
& Disarming the system for locking and unlocking the doors and ! Arming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than rear gate (5-door) and panic activation.
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The To enter the valet mode, change the CAUTION
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal In passive mode, the system will
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating automatically activate the alarm but
lights will flash twice. The flashing of the and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
security indicator light will then change WILL NOT automatically lock the
16. The security indicator light will con- doors. In order to lock the doors
slowly (once approximately every 3 sec- tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
onds from twice approximately every 2 you must either lock them as in-
indicating that the system is in the valet dicated in step 4 below or with the
seconds), indicating that the alarm system mode.
has been disarmed. key once they have been closed.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of Failure to lock the doors manually
NOTE your vehicle’s alarm system for activation will result in a higher security risk.
After disarming the alarm system, mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
briefly press the “ ” button a second ing the alarm system” F2-16. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
time within 5 seconds to unlock all position.
other doors and the rear gate (5-door). & Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been
! Emergency disarming
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
If you cannot disarm the system using the system is automatically accomplished
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, without using the remote transmitter. Note
broken or the transmitter battery is too that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
weak), you can disarm the system without MANUALLY LOCKED.
using the transmitter as follows.
. Turn the ignition switch from the ! To enter the passive mode
“LOCK” to the “ON” position with a If you wish to program the passive arming
registered key. mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
& Valet mode
1) ON
When you choose the valet mode, the 2) LOCK
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only 2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
– CONTINUED –
2-20 Keys and doors
“LOCK” position and remove the key from ! Disarming the system flashing.
the ignition switch. To disarm the system, briefly press the
3. Open the doors and get out of the “ ” button on the transmitter. & Shock sensors (dealer op-
vehicle. tion)
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when The shock sensors trigger the alarm
the alarm system has been triggered. system when they sense impacts applied
Also, the number of flashes indicates the to the vehicle and when any of their
location of unauthorized intrusion or the electric wires are cut. The alarm system
severity of impact on the vehicle. causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
When the ignition switch is turned to the the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
“ON” position, the indicator light will light a strong impact or multiple impacts by
for 1 second and then flash as follows. sounding the horn and flashing the turn
. When a door or rear gate (5-door) was signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
opened: 5 times seconds.
. When a door or the trunk (4-door) was If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
opened: 4 times connect them and set them for activation
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
. When the ignition switch was turned to or deactivation.
with the inside door lock levers.
the “ON” position: 3 times
5. Close the doors. The system will NOTE
automatically arm after 1 minute. . When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models . The shock sensors are not always
In the passive mode, the system can also with shock sensors (dealer option)) able to sense impacts caused by break-
be armed with the remote transmitter or ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
. When a light impact was sensed: once does not cause vibration (such as
with the power door locking switches. If (only models with shock sensors (dealer
the remote transmitter or power door breaking the glass using a rescue
option)) hammer).
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard- NOTE . The shock sensors may sense vi-
less of whether or not the passive mode bration as indicated in the following
Any of the above indicator light flash-
has been selected. examples and trigger the alarm system.
ings will recur each time the ignition
Select the settings of the alarm system
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
and shock sensors appropriately de-
Rearming the alarm system cancels the
pending on where you usually park
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2-22 Keys and doors
! Locking the passengers’ windows ! Passengers’ side switches ! Initialization of power window (type
A)
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window using the
following procedure to reactivate these
functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
1) Lock 1) Open position.
2) Unlock 2) Close
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
Push the lock switch. When the lock To open: by pushing down the power window
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the Push the switch down and hold it until the switch.
passengers’ windows cannot be opened window reaches the desired position. 4. Pull up the power window switch and
or closed. To close: close the window completely. Continue
Push the switch again to cancel the Pull the switch up and hold it until the pulling up the switch for approximately 1
passengers’ window locking. window reaches the desired position. second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches.
Keys and doors 2-25
Trunk lid (4-door) & To open and close the trunk & To lock and unlock the trunk
lid from outside lid release lever
The trunk lid can be opened using the
WARNING remote keyless entry system. Refer to
. To prevent dangerous exhaust “Remote keyless entry system” F2-8.
gas from entering the vehicle, To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
always keep the trunk lid closed trunk lid down until the latch engages.
while driving.
NOTE
. Help prevent children, adults or
Do not leave your valuables in the
animals from locking themselves
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high & To open the trunk lid from
enough to cause death or serious inside
heat-related injuries including
When you entrust your vehicle key to
brain damage to anyone locked
another person, you can lock the trunk lid
inside, particularly for small chil-
release lever to prevent luggage in the
dren.
trunk from being stolen. To lock the trunk
. When leaving the vehicle, either lid release lever, insert the master key or
close all windows and lock all submaster key into the key cylinder at the
doors. Also make certain that the rear of the release lever and turn it
trunk is closed. counterclockwise. Then, entrust the per-
son with the valet key only. To unlock the
trunk lid release lever, turn the key clock-
wise.
– CONTINUED –
2-26 Keys and doors
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, to fasten straps or ropes to
pull the yellow handle upward as indicated secure your cargo in the trunk. 2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
by the arrow on the handle. Such use may result in damage blade. Slide the screwdriver blade from
of the handle. the slit aperture of the lock assembly to
This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
the end until you hear a click.
push up the lid. . Load the trunk so that cargo can
not strike the release handle. If
The handle is made of material that the cargo hits the handle while
remains luminescent for approximately the vehicle is being driven, the
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is handle may be pulled up and the
exposed to ambient light even for a short trunk lid may open. That may
time. cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
Keys and doors 2-27
– CONTINUED –
2-28 Keys and doors
Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en- & Moonroof switches
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the ! Tilting moonroof
WARNING moonroof.
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, always con- conditions have caused it to
form to the following instructions freeze shut.
without exception. . The anti-entrapment function
. Before closing the moonroof, does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure 1) Raise
make sure that no one’s hands,
to confirm that it is safe to do so 2) Lower
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the before tilting the moonroof down. The tilting function will only operate when
moonroof. the moonroof is fully closed.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions. Push the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
ways remove the key from the switch to raise the moonroof.
ignition switch for safety and The moonroof operates only when the Push the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
never allow an unattended child ignition switch is in the “ON” position. switch to lower the moonroof.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could Release the switch after the moonroof has
result in injury to a child operat- been raised or has been lowered com-
ing the moonroof. pletely. Pushing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
– CONTINUED –
2-30 Keys and doors
NOTE After washing the vehicle or after it rains, & Sun shade
One-touch operation does not take wipe away water on the roof prior to
place when the moonroof is lowered. opening the moonroof to prevent drops
Push the switch continuously to raise of water from falling into the passenger
and lower the moonroof. compartment.
! Anti-entrapment function
! Sliding moonroof
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
The sun shade can be slid forward or
CAUTION backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
of your body. also moves back.
1) Open
2) Close
Push the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch rearward
NOTE
to open the moonroof. The sun shade will . For the sake of safety, it is recom-
also be opened together with the moon- mended that you avoid driving with the
roof. moonroof fully opened.
Push the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch forward . If the moonroof cannot be closed
to close the moonroof. through the switch operation because
of system failure, it can be closed
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- manually using a hex-head wrench.
way position while opening or closing it, For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof
momentarily push the switch to the – if moonroof cannot be closed” F9-19.
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 Coolant temperature low indicator light (non-
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 turbo models)/Coolant temperature high
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 warning light (non-turbo models)...................... 3-17
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Charge warning light.......................................... 3-18
START ................................................................ 3-4 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-18 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5 AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT models).............. 3-18
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-5 Rear differential oil temperature warning light
(STI) ................................................................ 3-19
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-6 models) ........................................................... 3-19
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-6 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-21
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Brake system warning light................................ 3-21
movement upon turning on the ignition Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-22
switch............................................................... 3-6 Hill start assist warning light (MT models – if
Meter/Gauge needle illumination setting (turbo equipped)/Hill start assist OFF indicator light
models except STI)............................................ 3-7 (STI) ................................................................ 3-22
Speedometer....................................................... 3-8 Door open warning light .................................... 3-23
Odometer/Trip meter............................................ 3-8 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) .......... 3-23
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-9 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10 light ................................................................ 3-23
Temperature gauge (turbo models) ..................... 3-11 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)................. 3-11 Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/Traction
Setting the alarm-level engine speed................... 3-12 Control OFF indicator light (STI)....................... 3-23
Deactivating the REV alarm system..................... 3-13 Security indicator light....................................... 3-25
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13 SPORT mode indicator light (AT models) ............ 3-25
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14 SI-DRIVE indicator light (STI).............................. 3-26
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15 Shift-up indicator light (STI) ............................... 3-26
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF Select lever/gear position indicator
indicators......................................................... 3-16 (AT models) ..................................................... 3-26
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-26
indicator lamp .................................................. 3-16 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-26
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-26
Instruments and controls
Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-27 Daytime running light system............................. 3-33
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-27 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-33
Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-27 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-33
Driver’s control center differential auto indicator Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-34
light (STI) ......................................................... 3-27
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-36
Driver’s control center differential indicator and
warning lights (STI) .......................................... 3-27 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-36
REV indicator light (STI) ..................................... 3-28 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-38
Clock ................................................................... 3-28 Rear window wiper and washer switch –
5-door ............................................................. 3-39
Information display ............................................ 3-29
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-40
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-29
Inside mirror...................................................... 3-40
Current fuel consumption (if equipped) ............... 3-30
Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-40
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-30
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Turn off display of fuel consumption (if equipped) .................................................... 3-41
indicator .......................................................... 3-31
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-47
Light control switch ........................................... 3-31
Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-48
Headlights.......................................................... 3-32
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-32 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-50
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-32 Horn .................................................................... 3-51
Instruments and controls 3-3
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The key can be turned from “Acc” to The engine is started in this position. The
“LOCK” only when the select lever is in the starter cranks the engine to start it. When
“P” position. the key is released (after the engine has
! MT models started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key
the “ON” position. or a metallic key holder.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
Meters and gauges trip meter back light illuminate. “Acc” position.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles Press the trip knob to show “ ” or “ ”
each show MAX position. on the odometer and trip meter display.
NOTE 3. Meter needles and gauge needles
Liquid-crystal displays are used in The display can be switched as shown in
each show MIN position. the following illustration by pressing the
some of the meters and gauges on 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
the combination meter. You will find trip knob.
gins.
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
& Combination meter illumina- ment upon turning on the
tion ignition switch
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence:
Turbo models:
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles and gauge needles illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
each show MAX position.
3. Meter needles and gauge needles *1: STI only
each show MIN position. *2: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ”
4. Meter and gauge dials, odometer and cannot be displayed when the ignition
trip meter back light illuminate. switch is in the “ON” position.
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
5. Regular illumination (for driving) be- *3: Turbo models except STI
movement of the meter needles and
gins. gauge needles that takes place when the To change the current setting, press the
Non-turbo models: ignition switch is turned to the “ON” trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
position.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter : Activated
needles, gauge needles, odometer and Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
3-8 Instruments and controls
be displayed when the ignition switch is & Odometer/Trip meter the “LOCK”, “Acc” or “ON” position.
in the “ON” position.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
3. To change the current setting, press switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch the indications while
: Activated the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
: Deactivated not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
NOTE the odometer/trip meter will turn off.
The initial illumination setting of the
meter/gauge needles of your vehicle The display can be switched as shown in
has been set for activation “ ” at the the following illustration by pressing the
time of shipment from the factory. trip knob.
Non-turbo models
*1: STI only
1) Trip knob
*2: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ”
This meter displays the odometer and two cannot be displayed when the ignition
trip meters when the ignition switch is in
Instruments and controls 3-9
switch is in the “ON” position. ! Double trip meter tion meter and battery is broken for any
*3: Turbo models except STI reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
! Odometer the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
The trip meter shows the distance that the mage to the engine.
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
The odometer shows the total distance To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
NOTE
that the vehicle has been driven. trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob For non-turbo models, to protect the
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 engine while the select lever is in the
seconds. “P” or “N” position (for AT models) or
the shift lever is in the neutral position
CAUTION (for MT models), the engine is con-
trolled so that the engine speed may
To ensure safety, do not attempt to not become too high even if the accel-
change the function of the indicator erator pedal is depressed hard.
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
– CONTINUED –
3-10 Instruments and controls
& Fuel gauge When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E” gauge meter.
even if the fuel tank contains fuel. This indicates that the fuel filler door
The gauge may move slightly during (lid) is located on the right side of the
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel vehicle.
level movement in the tank. ! Low fuel warning light
If you press the trip knob while the ignition The low fuel warning light illuminates
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position, when the tank is nearly empty [approxi-
the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp
amount of fuel remaining in the tank. gal)].
If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you It only operates when the ignition switch is
(a) do not press the trip knob for 10 in the “ON” position.
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
Turbo models
door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off. NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
NOTE tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
Non-turbo models
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
Instruments and controls 3-11
& Temperature gauge (turbo CAUTION REV indicator light and buz-
models) zer (STI)
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
13.
– CONTINUED –
3-12 Instruments and controls
NOTE
Even if the REV alarm system is not set,
the REV indicator light will illuminate
whenever the engine speed enters the
tachometer’s red zone.
4. When the trip knob is pushed, the 7. Every time that the trip knob is pushed
hundreds place flashes. and held, the buzzer changes to activate
5. Release your finger from trip knob or deactivate.
once, then push and hold the trip knob b – on: Activated
again. The number will change sequen- b – off: Deactivated
tially from 0 to 9. Release your finger at When the mode is changed to “activate”,
the desired alarm-level engine speed. the buzzer sounds.
6. When the trip knob is pushed, the 8. Push the trip knob to complete the
buzzer sounds and the REV alarm system setting procedure.
will automatically enter its new setting
mode (step 7 below), in which you can NOTE
2. When the trip knob is pushed for more activate or deactivate the buzzer.
than 2 seconds, the thousands place . The REV alarm system does not
<Selectable engine speed range> operate while settings are being en-
flashes.
The alarm-level engine speed can be set tered.
3. Release your finger from the trip knob (in 100 rpm steps) within the range from
once, then push and hold the trip knob . The speed-setting mode terminates
2,000 rpm to 7,000 rpm. if “--00” rpm is selected.
again. The number will change sequen-
tially from 2 to 7. Release your finger at . The speed-setting mode is canceled
the desired alarm-level engine speed. if the ignition switch is turned from ON
Instruments and controls 3-13
to OFF, OFF to ON, or the vehicle starts Warning and indicator lights : Coolant temperature high warning light
moving before the setting procedure is (non-turbo models)
finished. Several of the warning and indicator lights
. Setting the speed is impossible : Charge warning light
illuminate momentarily and then turn off
when the vehicle is moving. when the ignition switch is initially turned : Oil pressure warning light
. The set engine speed may differ to the “ON” position. This permits check-
from the engine speed shown by the ing the operation of the bulbs. : AT OIL TEMP warning light
tachometer. Use the engine speed (AT models)
Apply the parking brake and turn the
shown by the tachometer as a rough ignition switch to the “ON” position. For : Rear differential oil temperature warn-
guide. the system check, the following lights ing light (STI)
. If the setting operation is performed illuminate and turn off after several sec-
with the engine switch turned off, the onds or after the engine has started: : Low tire pressure warning light
REV indicator light turns off and the (U.S.- spec. models)
: Seatbelt warning light
setting operation is aborted when you
(The seatbelt warning light turns off / : ABS warning light
have stopped the setting operation for
only when the driver fastens the
approximately 10 seconds. / : Brake system warning light
seatbelt.)
. If the setting operation is performed
with the engine switch turned off, the : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning : Low fuel warning light
REV indicator light turns off and the light : Hill start assist warning light (MT
setting operation is aborted when you (The seatbelt warning light turns off models – if equipped)/Hill start assist
open and close the driver’s door. only when the front seat passenger OFF indicator light (STI)
fastens the seatbelt.)
& Deactivating the REV alarm : Door open warning light
system : SRS airbag system warning light
: AWD warning light (AT models)
To deactivate the REV indicator light and ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
buzzer functions of the REV alarm system, ON indicator light : Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
set the thousands place of the alarm-level indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
engine speed to “–”. : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
OFF indicator light
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- indicator light/Traction Control OFF
function indicator lamp indicator light (STI)
– CONTINUED –
3-14 Instruments and controls
The warning light(s) for unfastened to fail. seat are locked into place securely by
seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth.
steady illumination and flashing at table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will If still the seatbelt warning device for front
. Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s seat does not function cor-
not sound. seatback pocket.
– At speeds higher than approxi- rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to tions described above, immediately con-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front
The warning light(s) for unfastened tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tion.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback.
flashing and steady illumination at
. Do not use front seats with their back- & SRS airbag system
15-second intervals and the chime
ward-forward position and seatback not warning light
will sound while the warning light(s)
being locked into place securely. If any of
is/are flashing.
them are not locked securely, adjust them WARNING
. It is possible to cancel the warning again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
operation that follows the 6-second “Front seats” F1-2. If the warning light exhibits any of
warning after turning ON the ignition the following conditions, there may
switch. When the ignition switch is If the seatbelt warning device for the front be a malfunction in the seatbelt
turned ON next time, however, the passenger’s seat does not function cor- pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
complete sequence of the warning rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the system. Immediately take your vehi-
operation resumes. For further details front passenger’s seat is empty or it is cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
about canceling the warning operation, deactivated even when the front passen- to have the system checked. Unless
please contact your SUBARU dealer. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), checked and properly repaired, the
If there is no passenger on the front take the following actions. seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning . Ensure that no article is placed on the airbag will not operate properly in
device for the front passenger’s seat will seat other than a child restraint system the event of a collision, which may
be deactivated. The front passenger’s and its child occupant, although we increase the risk of injury.
occupant detection system monitors strongly recommend that all children sit . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
whether or not there is a passenger on in the rear seat properly restrained. ing light
the front passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket. . No illumination of the warning
Observe the following precautions. Failure
light when the ignition switch is
to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po- first turned to the “ON” position
functioning correctly or cause the device sition and seatback of front passenger’s
– CONTINUED –
3-16 Instruments and controls
approximately 2 seconds when the igni- NOTE check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. If the engine is restarted after a certain low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
After that, this indicator light/warning light driving condition, this indicator light/ at the proper level but the light remains
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- warning light may illuminate in RED. illuminated, contact your nearest
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light However, this is not a malfunction if the SUBARU dealer immediately.
turns off when the engine is warmed up indicator light/warning light turns off For details about checking the engine oil
sufficiently. after a short time. level or adding the engine oil, refer to
If the engine coolant temperature in- “Engine oil” F11-10.
creases over the specified range, the & Charge warning light CAUTION
indicator light/warning light blinks in
If this light illuminates when the engine is
RED. At this time, the engine is close to Do not operate the engine with the
running, it may indicate that the charging
overheating. oil pressure warning light illumi-
system is not working properly.
If the engine coolant temperature in- nated. This may cause serious en-
If the light illuminates while driving or does gine damage.
creases further, the indicator light/warning
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
light illuminates in RED continuously. At
engine at the first safe opportunity and
this time, the engine may be overheating.
check the alternator belt. If the belt is & AT OIL TEMP warning
When the indicator light/warning light loose, broken or if the belt is in good light (AT models)
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely condition but the light remains illuminated,
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and contact your nearest SUBARU dealer If this light illuminates when the engine is
refer to the emergency steps to take in the immediately. running, it may indicate that the automatic
case of engine overheating. Refer to transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
“Engine overheating” F9-13. After that, & Oil pressure warning If the light illuminates while driving, im-
have the system checked by your nearest light mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
SUBARU dealer. and let the engine idle until the warning
If this light illuminates when the engine is
Also, if the indicator light/warning light running, it may indicate that the engine oil light turns off.
often blinks in RED, the electrical system pressure is low and the lubricating system ! Automatic transmission control
may be malfunctioning. Contact your is not working properly. system warning
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. If the light illuminates while driving or does If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the after the engine starts, it may indicate that
engine at the first safe opportunity and the automatic transmission control system
Instruments and controls 3-19
is not working properly. Contact your NOTE the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
nearest SUBARU dealer for service im- . If the tire pressures are not correct sure label, you should determine the
mediately. and/or the tires are not all the same proper tire inflation pressure for those
size and brand, the rear differential will tires.)
& Rear differential oil be heavily loaded when the vehicle is As an added safety feature, your vehicle
temperature warning driven, resulting in an abnormally high has been equipped with a tire pressure
light (STI) oil temperature. monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
. The rear differential oil will deterio- a low tire pressure telltale when one or
CAUTION rate if its temperature increases en- more of your tires is significantly under-
ough for the rear differential oil tem- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
Reduce vehicle speed and park the perature warning light to illuminate. It is
vehicle in a safe place as soon as pressure telltale illuminates, you should
advisable to have the rear differential stop and check your tires as soon as
possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light oil replaced as soon as possible.
illuminates. Continued driving with possible, and inflate them to the proper
this light illuminated can damage pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
the rear differential and other parts
& Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
of the powertrain. warning light (U.S.-spec. can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
models) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
If this light illuminates when the engine is and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
When the ignition switch is turned to the stopping ability.
running, it may indicate that the rear “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
differential oil temperature is too hot. Please note that the TPMS is not a
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
At this time, the driver’s control center substitute for proper tire maintenance,
seconds to check that the tire pressure
differential will automatically cancel the and it is the driver’s responsibility to
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
current torque-distribution ratio setting and maintain correct tire pressure, even if
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
adopt its minimum ratio. under-inflation has not reached the level
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale.
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the should be checked monthly when cold
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
nearest safe place. Park the vehicle for and inflated to the inflation pressure
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
several minutes. After the light turns off, recommended by the vehicle manufac-
when the system is not operating properly.
you can start driving. turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
If the light does not turn off, contact the pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
nearest SUBARU dealer for service. a different size than the size indicated on
When the system detects a malfunction,
– CONTINUED –
3-20 Instruments and controls
the telltale will flash for approximately one soon as possible. dealer to have the system inspected.
minute and then remain continuously If this light illuminates while driving,
illuminated. This sequence will continue never brake suddenly and keep
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long driving straight ahead while gradu- CAUTION
as the malfunction exists. When the ally reducing speed. Then slowly
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the The tire pressure monitoring system
pull off the road to a safe place. is NOT a substitute for manually
system may not be able to detect or signal Otherwise an accident involving
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS checking tire pressure. The tire
serious vehicle damage and serious pressure should be checked peri-
malfunctions may occur for a variety of personal injury could occur.
reasons, including the installation of re- odically (at least monthly) using a
placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while tire gauge. After any change to tire
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres- pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant itoring system will not re-check tire
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes inflation pressures until the vehicle
one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have is first driven more than 20 mph (32
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS as soon as possible. sures, increase the vehicle speed to
to continue to function properly. When a spare tire is mounted or a at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
Should the warning light illuminate stea- wheel rim is replaced without the TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
dily after blinking for approximately one original pressure sensor/transmitter tion pressures. If the tire pressures
minute, have the system inspected by being transferred, the Low tire pres- are now above the severe low
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as sure warning light will illuminate pressure threshold, the low tire
possible. steadily after blinking for approxi- pressure warning light should turn
mately one minute. This indicates off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all sure to install the specified size for
four road wheels. Contact your the front and rear tires.
If this light does not illuminate SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi- If the light illuminates steadily after
mately one minute, you should have blinking for approximately one min-
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
Instruments and controls 3-21
& ABS warning light together with the brake system warning & Brake system
light if the EBD system malfunctions. For warning light
CAUTION further details of the EBD system mal-
function warning, refer to “Electronic WARNING
. If any of the following conditions Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
occur, we recommend that you warning” F3-22. . Driving with the brake system
have the ABS system repaired at warning light on is dangerous.
the first available opportunity by NOTE This indicates your brake system
your SUBARU dealer. If the warning light behavior is as may not be working properly. If
– The warning light does not described in the following conditions, the light remains illuminated,
illuminate when the ignition the ABS system may be considered have the brakes inspected by a
switch is turned to the “ON” normal. SUBARU dealer immediately.
position. . The warning light illuminates right . If at all in doubt about whether
– The warning light illuminates after the engine is started but turns off the brakes are operating prop-
when the ignition switch is immediately, remaining off. erly, do not drive the vehicle.
turned to the “ON” position, . The warning light remains illumi- Have your vehicle towed to the
but it does not turn off even nated after the engine has been started, nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
when the vehicle speed ex- but it turns off when the vehicle speed pair.
ceeds approximately 8 mph reaches approximately 8 mph (12
(12 km/h). km/h). This light has the following functions.
. The warning light illuminates during
– The warning light illuminates driving, but it turns off immediately and ! Parking brake warning
during driving. remains off. The light illuminates with the parking
. When the warning light is on (and When driving with an insufficient battery brake applied while the ignition switch is
the brake system warning light is voltage such as when the engine is jump in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
off), the ABS function shuts started, the ABS warning light may illumi- parking brake is fully released.
down. However, the conventional nate. This is due to the low battery voltage ! Brake fluid level warning
brake system continues to oper- and does not indicate a malfunction.
ate normally. This light illuminates when the brake fluid
When the battery becomes fully charged, level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
the light will turn off. of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
With a vehicle equipped with an EBD
system, the ABS warning light illuminates switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
– CONTINUED –
3-22 Instruments and controls
If the brake system warning light should take the following steps. light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi-
illuminate while driving (with the parking 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, ately.
brake fully released and with the ignition flat place.
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
NOTE
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn parking brake and then restart it. This light does not turn off unless the
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately tank is replenished up to an internal
3. Release the parking brake. If both
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
level is below the “MIN” mark in the the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have system inspected. CAUTION
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair. 4. If both warning lights illuminate again Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
and remain illuminated after the engine ever the low fuel warning light
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution has been restarted, shut down the engine
(EBD) system warning illuminates. Engine misfires as a
again, apply the parking brake, and check result of an empty tank could cause
The brake system warning light also the brake fluid level. damage to the engine.
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
together with the ABS warning light. malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the & Hill start assist warning
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the light (MT models – if
the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected.
equipped)/Hill start as-
warning light illuminate simultaneously 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
during driving. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
sist OFF indicator light
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- Instead, have the vehicle towed to the (STI)
tional braking system will still function. nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
However, the rear wheels will be more ! Hill start assist warning light
prone to locking when the brakes are & Low fuel warning light While the engine is rotating, if there are
applied harder than usual and the vehi- any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
cle’s motion may therefore become some- The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approxi- system, the light will illuminate.
what harder to control.
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp
If the brake system warning light and ABS gal). It only operates when the ignition WARNING
warning light illuminate simultaneously, switch is in the “ON” position. When this When the Hill start assist warning
Instruments and controls 3-23
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
light (yellow) the electronic control system of the dicator light (yellow)
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system . This light illuminates when the Vehicle
CAUTION malfunctions. Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is (except STI).
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- probably inoperative under any of the . This light illuminates when the Vehicle
tem provides its ABS control following conditions. Have your vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch is pressed
through the electrical circuit of the checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- for more than 2 seconds (STI).
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS ately.
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics . The light illuminates when the Vehicle
. The warning light does not illuminate Dynamics Control system is deactivated.
Control system becomes unable to
when the ignition switch is turned to the
provide ABS control. As a result, the NOTE
“ON” position.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the . The light may remain illuminated for
the warning light to illuminate. vehicle is running. a while after the engine has been
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics started, especially in cold weather. This
NOTE does not indicate the existence of a
Control and ABS systems are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as problem. The light should turn off as
functions of the brake system are described below, the Vehicle Dynamics soon as the engine has warmed up.
still available. You will be safe while Control system may be considered . The indicator light illuminates when
driving with this condition, but drive normal. the engine has developed a problem
carefully and have your vehicle . The warning light illuminates right and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
checked at a SUBARU dealer as after the engine is started but turns off malfunction indicator lamp is on.
soon as possible. immediately, remaining off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
. The warning light illuminates after probably malfunctioning under the follow-
engine startup and turns off while the ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
NOTE vehicle is subsequently being driven. at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle . The warning light illuminates during . The light does not turn off even after
Dynamics Control system itself mal- driving, but it turns off immediately and the lapse of several minutes (the engine
functions, the warning light only illumi- remains off. has warmed up) after the engine has
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock started.
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
Instruments and controls 3-25
– CONTINUED –
3-26 Instruments and controls
& SI-DRIVE indicator light (STI) & Select lever/gear position in- & Turn signal indicator
dicator (AT models) lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-47.
! Warning light
Clock CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time while driving, as an
accident from inadequate attention
to the road could result.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the time
will be erased. After reconnecting the
battery, set the correct time.
Information display The fuel consumption display is linked & Outside temperature indica-
with the odometer/trip meter display ac- tor
cording to the following chart.
Odometer/Trip
meter Fuel consumption indicator
– CONTINUED –
3-30 Instruments and controls
! Road surface freeze warning indi- “ON” position, the indication does not & Average fuel consumption
cation flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
corresponding to that trip meter indica- when the battery voltage is discon- Light control switch
tion is not shown until the vehicle has nected and then reconnected for bat-
subsequently covered a distance of 1 tery replacement or fuse replacement. The light control switch operates when the
mile (or 1 km). key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
& Turn off display of fuel con- control switch, the illuminated lights are
sumption indicator turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
The display of the fuel consumption
indicator can be turned off. NOTE
To turn off the display of the indicator, turn Even if the key is removed from the
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
and press the “+” button adjacent to the minated by operating the light control
information display for approximately 5 switch from “OFF” to the “ ” or “ ”
seconds. Then, the information display position. In this case, if the driver’s
and the clock display will blink for 3 door is opened, a chirp sound will
seconds to notify that the display of the inform the driver that the lights are
fuel consumption has been turned off. illuminated.
To restore the indicator, once again press
the “+” button for approximately 5 sec-
onds. CAUTION
& Daytime running light system Turn signal lever Illumination brightness con-
trol
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
– CONTINUED –
3-34 Instruments and controls
. In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer road film. Keep the washer button
the wiper blades are not frozen to fluid” F11-38. depressed at least for 1 second so that
the windshield or rear window Also, when driving the vehicle washer solution will be sprinkled all
before switching on the wipers. when there are freezing tempera- over the windshield or rear window.
Attempting to operate the wiper tures, use non-freezing type wi- . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
with the blades frozen to the per blades. rial on the windshield or the wiper
window glass could cause not blade results in jerky wiper operation
only the wiper blades to be . Do not clean the wiper blades and streaking on the glass. If you
damaged but also the wiper mo- with gasoline or a solvent, such cannot remove those streaks after
tor to burn out. If the wiper as paint thinner or benzine. This operating the washer or if the wiper
blades are frozen to the window will cause deterioration of the operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
glass, be sure to operate the wiper blades. face of the windshield or rear window
defroster, windshield wiper dei- and the wiper blades using a sponge or
cer (if equipped) or rear window NOTE soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
defogger before turning on the mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
. The wiper operates only when the rinse the window glass and wiper
wiper.
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” blades with clean water. The glass is
. If the wipers stop during opera- position.
tion because of ice or some other clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
obstruction on the window, the against overloads by a circuit breaker.
wiper motor could burn out even . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously even after following this procedure,
if the wiper switch is turned off. If under an unusually heavy load, the
this occurs, promptly stop the replace the wiper blades with new
circuit breaker may trip to stop the ones. For replacement instructions,
vehicle in a safe place, turn the motor temporarily. If this happens, park
ignition switch to the “LOCK” refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-39.
position and clean the window wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
glass to allow proper wiper op- mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
eration. will reset itself, and the wipers will
. Use clean water if windshield again operate normally.
washer fluid is unavailable. In . Clean your wiper blades and win-
areas where water freezes in dow glass periodically with a washer
winter, use SUBARU Windshield solution to prevent streaking, and to
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. remove accumulations of road salt or
– CONTINUED –
3-38 Instruments and controls
& Windshield wiper and washer ! Wiper intermittent time control ! Mist (for a single wipe)
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
! Windshield wipers
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- lever toward you. The wipers operate until
ing interval of the wiper. you release the lever.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
OFF: Off nine steps.
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
Instruments and controls 3-39
other similar items. Periodically wipe the displayed. & Auto-dimming mirror/com-
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will pass with HomeLink® (if
cotton cloth or an applicator. exit the zone setting mode. equipped)
! Compass zone adjustment
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the right button for 6 - 7
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and 1) HomeLink® button 1
Compass calibration zones direction will be displayed. 2) HomeLink® button 2
1. The zone setting is factory preset to 4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” 3) LED
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration disappears from the display (approxi- 4) HomeLink® button 3
zones” map shown above to verify that the mately two to three circles). The compass 5) Sensor
compass zone setting is correct for your is now calibrated. 6) Automatic dimming on/off button
geographical location. 7) Compass display button
5. Further calibration may be necessary
8) Compass display
2. Press and hold the right button for 3 should outside influences cause the mirror
seconds then release, and the word to read inaccurately. You will know that The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the this has occurred if your compass begins feature which automatically reduces glare
zone number will be displayed. to read in only limited directions. Should coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you encounter this situation, return to step you. It also contains a built-in compass
3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
one of the above procedure and recali- and HomeLink® wireless control system.
to cycle the display through all possible
zone settings. Stop cycling when the brate the mirror. . By pressing the automatic dimming on/
correct zone setting for your location is off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
– CONTINUED –
3-42 Instruments and controls
dimming function is on, the LED indicator ! Photosensors ! Compass zone adjustment
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with Compass calibration zones
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The mirror has a photosensor attached on
directly on the mirror as that may cause both the front and back sides. During 1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror nighttime driving, these sensors detect zones” map shown above to verify that
housing and damage the mirror. distracting glare from vehicle headlights the compass zone setting is correct for
behind you and automatically dim the your geographical location.
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve 2. Press and hold the compass display
your vision. For this reason, use care not button for 3 seconds until the zone
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other selection comes up (a number will be
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen- displayed in the mirror compass window).
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
3. Press the compass display button
cloth or an applicator.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
Instruments and controls 3-43
! Compass calibration www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- and objects are out of the way of
3515. the garage door or other device
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali- to prevent potential harm or
Note the following information about this
brated. damage.
system.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8 If your vehicle is equipped with the . Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-
km/h) or less until the display reads a HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it less Control System with a gar-
direction. complies with Part 15 of the Federal age door opener that lacks the
3. You can also calibrate the compass by Communications Commission Rules in safety stop and reverse feature
driving your vehicle on your everyday the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry as required by applicable safety
routine. The compass will be calibrated Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject standards. A garage door opener
once it has tracked a complete circle. to the following two conditions: which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and (1) this device may not cause harmful
reverse, does not meet these
hold the compass display button for 9 interference, and (2) this device must
safety standards. Using a garage
seconds until a “C” appears in the accept any interference received, includ-
door opener without these fea-
compass window. ing interference that may cause undesired
tures increases risk of serious
5. Calibrate the compass according to operation.
injury or death. For more infor-
step 2 or step 3. Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink®
by anyone other than an authorized website at www.homelink.com or
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to call 1-800-355-3515.
tem use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are CAUTION
devices such as gate operators, garage registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
and security systems. Wireless Control System to operate
WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
There are three HomeLink® buttons on the gate, unplug the device’s motor
mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the from the outlet during programming
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- to prevent motor burnout.
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people
– CONTINUED –
3-44 Instruments and controls
NOTE NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink® Some gate operators and garage door
Wireless Control System for the de- openers may require you to replace
sired devices, retain the hand-held this programming step 4 with proce-
transmitters for further programming dures in “Programming for entrance
or device testing in the event of a gates and garage door openers in
problem. Canada” F3-45.
. It is recommended that you insert a
5. Hold down both buttons until the
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
ter of a device to ensure correct
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
programming.
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
! Garage door opener programming in released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
the U.S.A. 1) HomeLink® button 1 cates successful programming of the new
2) HomeLink® button 2 frequency signal.)
NOTE 3) HomeLink® button 3 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
When programming the HomeLink® ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
2. Press and hold the two outer light. If the indicator light stays on con-
Wireless Control System for a garage HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
door opener, it is suggested that you tinuously, your garage door should acti-
3) until the indicator light begins to flash vate and the programming is completed.
park the vehicle outside the garage. (after approximately 20 seconds). Then
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door release both buttons. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
opener from the outlet. 3. Hold the end of the garage door seconds and then stays on continuously,
opener’s hand-held transmitter between your garage door opener may be pro-
NOTE 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from tected by a rolling code feature. In this
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are the HomeLink® button you wish to pro- case you need to perform the additional
already programmed for other devices, gram. steps that are described in “Programming
skip step 2 because it clears the rolling-code-protected garage door open-
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
memory of all three buttons. ers in the U.S.A.” F3-45.
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
Instruments and controls 3-45
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly begins to flash slowly (after approximately
and then rapidly after several seconds, 20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
release both buttons. mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ (25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
garage door opener to the outlet. button you wish to program.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
opener by pressing the programmed mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
HomeLink® button. light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless rapidly, release both buttons.
Control System
The programming for the previous device
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire- is now erased and the new device can be
1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to operated by pressing the HomeLink®
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its button.
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but- ! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted. NOTE
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light . Performing this procedure erases
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
the memory of all the preprogrammed
seconds). Then release both buttons. To program other devices such as door buttons simultaneously. The memory
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ locks, home lighting and security systems, of individual buttons cannot be erased.
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com . It is recommended that upon the
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515. sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single HomeLink® programmed HomeLink® buttons be
wish to program. button erased for security purposes.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
Instruments and controls 3-47
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2 1) Selection switch
3) HomeLink® button 3 ! Convex mirror (passenger side) 2) Direction control switch
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons WARNING The remote control mirrors operate only
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
light begins to flash (after approximately Objects look smaller in a convex “Acc” position.
20 seconds). mirror and farther away than when 1. Press either end of the selection
2. Release both buttons. viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.
the convex mirror to judge the 2. Move the direction control switch in the
! In case a problem occurs distance of vehicles behind you direction you want to move the mirror.
If you cannot activate a device using the when changing lanes. Use the inside 3. Return the selection switch to the
corresponding HomeLink® button after mirror (or glance backwards) to neutral position to prevent unintentional
programming, contact HomeLink® at determine the actual size and dis- operation.
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- tance of objects that you view in
3515 for assistance. convex mirror. The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
– CONTINUED –
3-48 Instruments and controls
! Power folding mirror switch (if mirror switch continuously, it may not Defogger and deicer
equipped) work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
ate the switch again after waiting for a
short period of time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
window defogger. Some models are also windshield wiper blades have been deiced
equipped with an outside mirror defogger completely before that time, push the
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de- control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
fogger and deicer system is activated only ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” you have to push the control switch to turn
position. them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, it is possible to set the
defogger and deicer system for the con-
tinuous operation mode as follows.
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
gation system:
Automatic climate control system The setting can be changed for the
To activate the defogger and deicer continuous operation mode using the
system, push the control switch that is navigation monitor. For details, refer to
located on the climate control panel. The the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
rear window defogger, outside mirror navigation system.
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are The setting can also be changed by a
Manual climate control system activated simultaneously. The indicator SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
light on the control switch illuminates while dealer for details.
the defogger and deicer system is acti- . Models without genuine SUBARU
vated. navigation system:
The setting can be changed by a
To turn them off, push the control switch
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
again. They also turn off when the ignition
dealer for details.
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position. If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
The defogger and deicer system will
the defogger and deicer system is can-
automatically shut off after approximately
celed and the system stops operating.
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
– CONTINUED –
3-50 Instruments and controls
Horn
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Climate control
Ventilator
& Airflow selection
Climate control 4-3
& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. 3) Thumb-wheel
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. 1) Temperature control dial
To open or close the ventilator, turn the 2) Fan speed control dial
thumb-wheel up or down. 3) Airflow control dial
4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
F3-48.)
5) Air conditioner button
6) Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets over a range
from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm).
– CONTINUED –
4-4 Climate control
! Fan speed control dial less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will illumi-
The fan operates only when the ignition tioner button to defog the windshield nate.
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The more quickly. However the indicator on
the air conditioner button will not Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
fan speed control dial is used to select
four fan speeds. illuminate. At the same time, the air ! Air inlet selection button
inlet selection is automatically set to
! Airflow control dial “outside air” mode.
Each dial position activates the following In this state, you cannot select “recir-
air outlets. culation” mode by manually pressing
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets the air inlet selection button.
Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and tioner compressor by pressing the air
foot outlets conditioner button.
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of ! Air conditioner button
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out- recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of air inlet selection button to the ON posi-
the instrument panel tion. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place the air inlet selection button to the
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
ON position for fast cooling with the air
side outlets of the instrument panel
conditioner or when driving on a dusty
For details, refer to “Airflow selection” F4- road.
2.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
NOTE The air conditioner operates only when drawn into the passenger compartment.
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or the engine is running. Push the air inlet selection button again to
“ ” position, the air conditioner com- the OFF position. The indicator light will
Push the air conditioner button while the turn off.
pressor operates automatically regard-
fan is in operation to turn on the air
Climate control 4-5
Place the air inlet selection button to the ! Defrosting or defogging the wind- ! Heating and defrosting
OFF position when the interior has cooled shield
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty.
WARNING
Continued operation with the air
inlet selection button in the ON
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the OFF position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
& Heater operation To direct warm air toward the floor and the
To direct warm air to the windshield and windshield:
NOTE front door windows: 1. Set the airflow control dial to the “ ”
. When the “ ” or “ ” position is 1. Set the airflow control dial to the “ ” position.
selected, the air conditioner compres- position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the
sor automatically operates regardless 2. Turn the temperature control dial all most comfortable level.
of the position of the air conditioner the way to the right. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the
button to defog the windshield more
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
quickly. At the same time, the air inlet
highest speed.
selection is automatically switched to
the OFF position (outside air). How-
ever, the air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate at this time.
. When defrosting, defogging or heat-
ing, warm air is also emitted from the
right and left air outlets. To stop warm
airflow from these outlets, turn the
corresponding thumb wheel down.
– CONTINUED –
4-6 Climate control
! Heating ! Bi-level heating outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
! Ventilation
To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument
OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets:
2. Set the airflow control dial to the “ ” foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the airflow control dial to the “ ”
most comfortable level. OFF position. position.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the airflow control dial to the “ ” 3. Set the temperature control dial all the
desired speed. position. way left.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature level. desired speed.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired speed. When driving on a dusty road, set the air
inlet selection button to the “ON” position.
Setting the temperature control dial fully
turned to the red area or blue area WARNING
decreases the temperature difference
between the air from the instrument panel Continued operation with the air
Climate control 4-7
inlet selection button in the ON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the set in the “ ” or “ ” position to provide
position may fog up the windows. “ON” position. better defogging performance.
Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
as the outside dusty condition blue side.
clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
& Air conditioner operation
! Defrosting or defogging
! Cooling or dehumidifying
Automatic climate control & Control panel & To use as full-automatic cli-
system (if equipped) mate control system
Place the temperature control dial in the
Although this climate control system can position for your desired temperature, then
be used as a full-automatic climate control set the other dials and buttons as de-
system, it can also, if desired, be used as scribed in the following. The system’s
a semi-automatic climate control system. functions will then switch to AUTO mode
When it is used as a full-automatic climate and be controlled automatically.
control system, the outlet air temperature, . Airflow control dial: AUTO position
fan speed, airflow distribution, air inlet . Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation are all automatically controlled & To use as semi-automatic
to maintain a constant, comfortable tem-
perature inside the vehicle.
climate control system
1) Temperature control dial Each function can be individually set to
NOTE 2) Fan speed control dial AUTO mode independently of the others.
. Operate the automatic climate con- 3) Airflow control dial Any function set to AUTO mode is con-
trol system when the engine is running. 4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer trolled automatically. Any function not set
system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer” to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
. When the engine coolant is cold, the F3-48.)
blower does not run. as desired.
5) Air inlet selection button
. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air 6) Air conditioner button The temperature can be set within a range
temperature in the passenger compart- of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).
ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi-
tioner compressor does not operate.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor.
Climate control 4-9
& Fan speed control dial NOTE the system gives maximum cooling per-
With the fan speed control dial in the formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-
AUTO position and the airflow control wise, the system gives maximum heating
dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position, performance.
the fan does not operate during engine
warm-up until the engine coolant tem- & Airflow control dial
perature exceeds approximately 1228F
(508C).
– CONTINUED –
4-10 Climate control
the instrument panel and some through & Air inlet selection button senger compartment, the intensity of sun-
windshield defroster outlets (A small light, and other factors. Pressing the air
amount of air flows to the windshield and inlet selection button cancels the “AUTO”
both side windows to prevent fogging.) mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out- fan speed control dial or airflow control
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of dial to a position other than the AUTO
the instrument panel position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode.
: Windshield defroster outlets and both SUBARU recommends using the AUTO
side outlets of the instrument panel position.
& Air conditioner button Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO” & Temperature sensors
mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the
fan speed control dial or airflow control
dial to a position other than the AUTO
position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode.
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO
position.
NOTE
The air conditioner’s compressor does
not operate with an outside tempera-
ture of 328F (08C) or lower.
properly and become damaged, the sys- Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker
tem may not be able to control the interior cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Cleaning ventilation grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling
cautions. efficiency.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors. & Lubrication oil circulation in
– Do not cover the sensors. the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
The sensors are located as follows. a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield speeds) a few minutes each month during
defroster grille. the off-season to circulate its oil.
– Interior air temperature sensor: near
the ignition switch. & Checking air conditioning
– Outside temperature sensor: behind system before summer sea-
the front grille. son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have the air con-
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. ditioning system checked by your
Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer.
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
& Efficient cooling after parking Under certain weather conditions (high
in direct sunlight relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
Climate control 4-13
& Air conditioner compressor Replace the filter element according to the & Replacing an air filter
shut-off when engine is replacement schedule as follows. This
1. Remove the glove box.
heavily loaded schedule should be followed to maintain
(1) Open the glove box.
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
the air conditioner compressor is designed extremely dusty conditions, the filter
to temporarily shut off during air condi- should be replaced more frequently. It is
tioner operation whenever the accelerator recommended that you have your filter
is fully depressed such as during rapid checked or replaced by your SUBARU
acceleration or when driving on a steep dealer. For replacement, use only a
upgrade. genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
& Refrigerant for your climate Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
control system km) whichever comes first
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the CAUTION
refrigerant is different from the method for (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU Contact your SUBARU dealer if the glove box.
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a following occurs, even if it is not yet
result of using the wrong refrigerant are time to change the filter:
not covered under warranty. . Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
– CONTINUED –
4-14 Climate control
(3) Pull out the glove box. 3. Replace the air filter element with a 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
new one. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION 6. LABEL installation
The arrow mark on the filter must (1) Attach the service label to the
point UP. driver’s side door pillar.
1) Caution label
(2) Attach the caution label next to the
air filter as shown in the illustration.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-23
Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-3 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-24
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-26
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-27
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 Repeating .......................................................... 5-28
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Random playback .............................................. 5-29
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Scan ................................................................. 5-30
Type C audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-7 Display selection ............................................... 5-30
Power and sound controls ................................. 5-8 Folder selection ................................................. 5-31 5
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-8 How to eject a CD from the player (type A and
C).................................................................... 5-32
Sound control ..................................................... 5-8
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-32
Adjustable level of each mode ............................ 5-11
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-33
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-12 Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)...................... 5-34
FM/AM selection................................................. 5-12
Precautions to observe when handling a
Tuning ............................................................... 5-12
compact disc................................................... 5-35
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-15 USB storage device / iPod® operations
Station preset .................................................... 5-16 (type C audio) ................................................. 5-37
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-17 Play file ............................................................. 5-37
TM
XM satellite radio (U.S.A. only) ........................ 5-17 Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-37
Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-17 Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-38
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-17 Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-38
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-18 How to play back ............................................... 5-39
Band selection ................................................... 5-19 To select a track/index from its beginning .......... 5-40
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-19 To select a chapter from its beginning when
connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-40
Channel preset................................................... 5-21
Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-40
Display selection................................................ 5-22
Repeating .......................................................... 5-40
CD player operation ........................................... 5-23 Random playback .............................................. 5-41
Play file.............................................................. 5-23 SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
How to insert a CD (type A and C) ...................... 5-23 device) ............................................................ 5-41
Audio
Selecting category (only when connecting Bluetooth® audio (type C audio)....................... 5-45
iPod®) .............................................................. 5-41 Media format ..................................................... 5-45
Display selection................................................ 5-42 Setting Bluetooth® audio.................................... 5-45
Folder selection (only when connecting USB Bluetooth® audio operation ................................ 5-45
storage device) ................................................ 5-42
Hands-free system (if equipped) ...................... 5-46
When “CHECK DEVICE” is displayed.................. 5-42
Tips for the Hands-free system .......................... 5-47
Audio control buttons (if equipped).................. 5-42 Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-48
MODE button ..................................................... 5-42 Safety precautions ............................................. 5-49
“ ” and “ ” buttons ......................................... 5-43 Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-49
Volume control buttons ...................................... 5-44 Bluetooth® setting ............................................. 5-59
MUTE button (models without Hands-free
system)............................................................ 5-44
Audio 5-3
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-8
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-12
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-17
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-23
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-34
– CONTINUED –
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-8
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-12
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-17
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-23
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-34
Audio 5-7
& Type C audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-8
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-12
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-17
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-23
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-34
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-37
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-46
5-8 Audio
Power and sound controls The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF)
and volume control. The radio is turned
& Power switch and volume ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the
control volume is controlled by turning the dial.
Type C audio
Each brief press of the sound control dial
changes the control modes in the follow-
ing sequence.
Type A and B audio
Type A and B audio Choose the desired level for each mode
by turning the sound control dial.
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
Type C audio
Audio 5-9
! Other sound setting controls Type A audio: this automatic volume change can be set
in the range from OFF to 2. The initial
setting is OFF.
! BEEP setting
A beep sound (operation sound) that
Type B audio: occurs when the audio system is operated
can be set ON/OFF. The initial setting is
ON.
! SRS CS Auto setting (type B audio)
SRS CS Auto can be set ON/OFF. When
Type C audio:
this setting is ON, “ ” is displayed on the
screen.
Type A and B audio NOTE
SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch equiva-
lent surround field using 10 speakers
Choose the desired settings for each that are installed in the vehicle.
mode by turning the sound control dial.
SRS CS Auto features:
The control function returns to the tune/ 1) Sound originating from door mount
track/channel control mode after approxi- speakers can be heard at ear level
mately 5 seconds. (built in SRS FOCUS effect).
2) Ultra rich bass sound can be ob-
! SPEED VOLUME setting
tained from standard door mount
SPEED VOLUME CONTROL is a function speakers (built in SRS TruBass effect).
that automatically adjusts the volume 3) Surround sound can be obtained
according to the vehicle speed. As the from 2-channel stereo sources such as
vehicle speed increases, the audio vo- CD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS Circle
Type C audio lume automatically increases to match the Surround II effect).
Each brief press of the “MENU” button vehicle speed, in order to create a 4) SRS CS Auto can position the
changes the control modes in the follow- pleasant listening environment even as center channel image in the center of
ing sequence. the driving noise increases. The amount of the vehicle’s windshield. This elimi-
– CONTINUED –
5-10 Audio
*: For type A and B audio, AUX volume can be adjusted only when an AUX audio product is connected.
5-12 Audio
Type C audio
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio
Audio 5-13
! Seek tuning (SEEK) and stop at the first one it finds. This
function may not be available, however,
when radio signals are weak. In such a
situation, perform manual tuning to select
the desired station.
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
Type C audio
Type A and B audio If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode,
the radio scans through the radio band
until a station is found. The radio will stop
at the station for 5 seconds while display-
Type A and B audio ing the frequency, after which scanning
will continue until the entire band has been
scanned.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop at any
displayed channel.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
Type C audio tall buildings and hills.
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button briefly, the radio will auto-
matically search for a receivable station
– CONTINUED –
5-14 Audio
! PTY (Program type) group tuning PTY group that you are currently listening
(only FM reception) to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In the
PTY selection mode, “PTY” is displayed
on the screen.
! PTY (Program type) group selection
Type C audio
In the PTY selection mode, press the
Type A and B audio “FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button “ ” or “ ” to
change the PTY group by one step at a
time.
Type A and B audio Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up
by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the
PTY group down by one step.
This operation only changes the display. It
does not change the station that is
currently being received.
Type C audio
Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to
the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
Audio 5-15
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group seeks within that PTY group.
Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ”
seeks down.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
Type C audio
Type A and B audio If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
the “TEXT” button changes the display
among PS, RT and frequency. The initial
setting is “PS”.
NOTE
. The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for PS is 8.
Type A and B audio . The maximum number of characters
that can be displayed for RT is 64.
. If RT is 13 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
Type C audio the page.
In the PTY selection mode, when the
desired PTY group has been selected,
pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ”
– CONTINUED –
5-16 Audio
Satellite radio operation (if www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS ! XMTM satellite radio reception tips
(7474) for more information. Sirius, the for antenna on the windshield (for
equipped) Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos U.S.A. only — if equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
install the SUBARU genuine satellite Inc.
receiver (optional equipment) and to enter
into a contract. For details, please contact & Satellite radio reception
your SUBARU dealer. Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
& XMTM satellite radio (U.S.A. areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
only) tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
radio service, which includes music, news,
stances that may result in signal loss
sports, talk and children’s programming.
include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
XMTM provides digital quality audio and
or driving on the lower level of a multi-
text information, including song title and
tiered road or inside of a parking garage. For some models, the satellite radio
artist name. A service fee is required to
receive the XMTM service. For more To help reduce this condition, satellite antenna is fixed to the upper right hand
information, contact XMTM at radio providers have installed ground- corner of the windshield.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- based repeaters in heavily populated
The XMTM satellite radio receiver that is
RADIO (1-800-967-2346). areas. However, you may still experience
fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-
reception problems in some areas.
sary signals from two specially designated
& Sirius satellite radio satellites that are in a geostationary orbit
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation over the equator. One satellite covers the
that allows the listener to experience east coast and the other covers the west
digital sound quality and to have a greater coast. Both of them direct their signals
variety of channels. north. These signals are then relayed
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a throughout the radio reception area by a
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For network of ground repeater stations. The
details, please contact your SUBARU satellite radio signals are transmitted as
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at “line of sight” signals. The line of sight
– CONTINUED –
5-18 Audio
signals can be blocked by objects such as . If you drive under a bridge unforeseen circumstances when there
buildings, but the network of repeater . If you are driving next to a tall vehicle are problems with the reception of XMTM
stations allows signal coverage within (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the satellite radio signals.
urban areas such as cities. signal
You may experience problems in receiving . If you are driving in a valley where the & Displaying satellite radio ID
XMTM satellite radio signals in the follow- surrounding hills or peaks block the signal of tuner
ing situations. from the south When you activate satellite radio, you
. If you are driving northward in a coastal . If you are driving on a mountain road should have your satellite radio tuner ID
area where the southern direction is blocked by ready because each tuner is identified by
Because the satellite radio antenna is mountains its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
located on the windshield, the signal The satellite radio ID will be needed when
comes from the south and may not be you activate satellite radio and receive
able to reach the antenna in some satellite radio customer support.
circumstances when you are driving north. The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
the satellite radio channel.
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
operation.
. If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
for example on a road that goes through a
dense forest
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . The signal can become weak in some
covered parking area areas that are not covered by the repeater
. If you are driving beneath the top level station network.
of a multi-level freeway Please note that these may be other
Audio 5-19
Type C audio
Type A and B audio Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
wise to select the next channel and turn
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counterclock-
wise to select the previous channel.
Type C audio
Push the “SAT” button when the radio is
off to turn on the radio.
Push the “SAT” button when the radio is
– CONTINUED –
5-20 Audio
Type C audio
Type A and B audio To activate the category search mode,
press the “PTY/CAT” button. To deactivate
the category search mode, press the
“PTY/CAT” button again.
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK”
button “ ” or “ ” continuously to
Type A and B audio
change to the channel selection mode.
Audio 5-21
Type C audio
When in the category search mode, Type A and B audio
pressing the “FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button
“ ” changes the category up by one step.
Pressing “ ” changes the category down
by one step.
When a category is selected, turning the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial selects channels
only within the selected category.
The control function returns to the normal
mode after approximately 10 seconds.
Preset buttons (type A and B audio)
Type C audio
Press the “SCAN” button to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
under the selected category, the radio
– CONTINUED –
5-22 Audio
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such
as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset buttons.
! Selecting preset channels
Presetting a channel with a preset button
allows you to select that channel in a
single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
Preset buttons (type C audio) Type C audio
& Display selection
! How to preset channels Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
the satellite radio to change the display as
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1, follows.
SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Select the desired channel.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
channel. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
CD player operation folder: 255 and the player will automatically pull the
– Maximum number of files on a disc into position.
NOTE CD: 510
NOTE
. Make sure to always insert a disc DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
with the label side up. If a disc is & Play file
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE SAME
inserted with the label side down, the MP3: TIME.
player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer . Based on MPEG1, 2 and 2.5 Layer3
to “When the following messages are . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
displayed” F5-33. & How to insert a CD(s) (type B)
22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
broadcast. . Supports variable bit rates
. After the last song finishes, the disc WMA:
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first track on the disc) and will auto- . Based on Windows Media Audio 9
matically play back. . Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
. The player is designed to be able to
AAC (type C audio):
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain . Based on MPEG4 AAC (ISO/IEC
ones. 14496-12: 2003+iTune Meta-data Specifi-
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not cation)
supported, and if inserted, they will be . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
immediately ejected. 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
. Copyright protected WMA/AAC files . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
magazine in the player has an idle
will not be played by the system. The . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch position where you can insert a disc, the
player will automatically skip to the disc number indicator associated with the
next file (track). & How to insert a CD (type A idle position will blink.
. CDs that can be played back are and C)
accompanied by the following restric- If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
tions. Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole no idle position in the magazine.
while gripping the edge of the disc, then 2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
– Maximum number of folders: 255
insert it into the slot (with the label side up) nates, insert the disc. Once you have
– Maximum number of files in a
– CONTINUED –
5-24 Audio
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will player will enter standby mode. Press the
turn off. The disc will then be automatically “CD/AUX” button to start playback.
drawn in, and the player will begin to play ! Loading all the magazine (full disc
back the first track of the disc. loading mode)
. To insert more discs in succession, 1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”
repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
be loaded with discs in the ascending player will produce beep sound and will
order of position number. enter the full disc loading mode.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds 2. When the disc number indicator
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
the player will begin to play back the first nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
track of the last disc you have inserted. disc is successfully loaded during this
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a Disc select buttons period, the disc number indicator will stop
disc is already inserted in the correspond- blinking and will steadily light.
2. Press the disc select button at the
ing position of the magazine. 3. When the loading of a disc is com-
position where you want to insert a disc.
. While the player is in the loading mode, plete, the next disc number indicator will
3. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
if you press “FM/AM” or “SAT” button, the blink. Then repeat Step 2.
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
player will enter the standby mode. Press 4. When the magazine is filled with discs
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
the “CD/AUX” button to start playback. by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically
drawn in, and the player will begin to play start playback of the discs, beginning with
! Inserting a disc in a desired posi- the first track on the disc. the one inserted first.
tion
. If you wish to insert another disc, If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the seconds interval, the full disc loading
magazine in the player has an idle repeat the procedure beginning with step
1. mode will be canceled, and the player will
position where you can insert a disc, the start playback of the disc inserted first.
disc number indicator associated with the If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
idle position will blink. after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, & How to play back a CD
The positions in the magazine the indica- the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted. ! When there is no CD inserted
tor of which steadily lights up are already
loaded with discs. . While the player is in the loading mode, Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
if you press “FM/AM” or “SAT” button, the insert a CD (type A and C)” F5-23/“How
Audio 5-25
to insert a CD(s) (type B)” F5-23. ! When there are CDs loaded (type B) ! When CD is in the player (type C)
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
! When CD is in the player (type A)
– CONTINUED –
5-26 Audio
& To select a track from its Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
beginning wise to skip to the beginning of the next
track/file. Each time the dial is turned, the
! Forward direction indicated track/file number will increase.
NOTE
In an MP3, WMA or AAC (type C audio)
folder, skipping past the last track/file
will take you back to the first track/file
in the folder.
! Backward direction
Type C audio
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track/file. Each time the dial is
Type A and B audio turned, the indicated track/file number will
decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3, WMA or AAC (type C audio)
folder, skipping past the first track/file
will take you to the last track/file in the
folder.
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
Audio 5-27
& Fast-forwarding and fast-re- Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
versing continuously to fast-forward the disc/
folder.
! Fast-forwarding Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward to the end of the last
track/file, fast-forwarding will stop and
the player will start playback beginning
with the first track/file. In an MP3, WMA
or AAC (type C audio) folder, the player
will start playback beginning with the
first track/file of the current folder.
Type C audio
! Fast-reversing Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
continuously to fast-reverse the disc/
folder.
Type A and B audio Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
NOTE
If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
the first track/file, fast-reversing will
stop and the player will start playback.
In an MP3, WMA or AAC folder (type C
audio), the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file of the
current folder.
Type A and B audio
Type C audio
– CONTINUED –
5-28 Audio
& Repeating Each time you briefly press the button, the turn off, and the normal playback mode
mode changes in the following se- will be resumed.
quences.
Type A and C audio: NOTE
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps.
. Press the “ ” button
*: Type C audio only . Press the disc select button (type B
Type B audio: audio)
. Press the “SCAN” button
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
(type B audio)
Type A and B audio NOTE
. The “RPT” indication refers to the
repeat playback of a single track. It
repeats the track that is playing.
. The “F-RPT” indication refers to the
repeat playback of a folder. It repeats
the all of the tracks in the folder. It is
possible to select the function when
the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing.
. The “D-RPT” indication refers to the
repeat playback of a disc. It repeats the
tracks on the CD. It is only possible to
select this function for type B audio.
Type C audio
To cancel the track/file repeat-play mode,
To repeat a track/file, briefly press the briefly press the “RPT/RDM” button and
“RPT/RDM” button while the track/file is select CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will
playing.
Audio 5-29
& Scan scanning upward beginning with the track/ & Display selection
file(s) following the currently selected one.
After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have
been scanned, normal playback will be
resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
the “SCAN” button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT/RDM” button
. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button
Type A and B audio . Press the “ ” button Type A and B audio
. Press the disc select button (type B
audio)
. Select the radio or AUX mode
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine
(type B audio)
. Press the “PTY/CAT” button
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position
For MP3/WMA/AAC:
For iPod®:
Type C audio
Press the “ ” side of the “FOLDER/PTY/
CAT” button briefly to select the next
*1: For type C audio, “ARTIST TITLE” is
Type A and B audio folder. Press the “ ” side of the button
displayed.
briefly to go back to the previous folder.
*2: For type C audio, “FOLDER TITLE” is For type A and B audio, the folder title will
displayed. be shown each time you press one of the
*3: For type C audio, “FILE TITLE” is displayed. buttons.
! Page (track/folder title) scroll NOTE
If you press the “TEXT” button again for at . Selecting folders in this way is
least 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled possible only within a single disc.
so you can see all of it. . Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re-
cognized when an attempt to select the
NOTE next or previous folder is made. If no
. The display is designed to show appropriate folder exists on the disc,
titles for up to 24 characters. pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the
. If no operations are performed for 10 “FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button starts play-
seconds, the screen that was displayed back beginning with the first track/file.
before pressing the “TEXT” button for
– CONTINUED –
5-32 Audio
& How to eject a CD from the . If the disc is left ejected for more
player (type A and C) than approximately 15 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, a disc protection func-
tion will operate, automatically reload-
ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not
played.
! Ejecting all discs from the player the player is in all disc ejection mode, ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
(all disc ejection mode) the mode will be cancelled following Press the eject button to unload the discs.
ejection of the disc that is currently Check that the disc is not damaged or
being ejected. scratched, and also check that the disc is
. If you press the “CD/AUX” button or inserted correctly. This message may
“LOAD” button while the player is in all appear when using some CD-RW discs.
disc ejection mode, the player will draw Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
in the discs that have been ejected and CDs are not supported) and data format
play them. are correct. This player can only play
MP3, WMA and AAC (type C audio) data
& When the following mes- formats. If the disc cannot be unloaded or
sages are displayed this message remains displayed, please
If one of the following messages is contact your SUBARU dealer.
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
1. If you continue to press the “ ” ing information. If you cannot clear those
button, the player will produce beep sound messages, please contact your SUBARU
and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At dealer.
this time, the disc number indicator and ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
“ALL EJECT” indicator will flash. Press the eject button to unload the disc.
2. Remove the disc that has been Check the disc for damage or deforma-
ejected. The other discs loaded will then tion, and also check that the correct disc is
be ejected one after another. If you do not inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
remove the disc that has been ejected, the forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled. are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message
NOTE will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD unloaded or this message remains dis-
sticking out, because vibration might played, please contact your SUBARU
make it fall out. dealer.
. If you press the “ ” button while
5-34 Audio
– CONTINUED –
5-36 Audio
– CONTINUED –
5-38 Audio
NOTE
. Depending on the number of files
stored in an iPod® and the firmware
– CONTINUED –
5-40 Audio
version, the iPod® may not activate NOTE ! When connecting iPod®
smoothly after operation or not work When connecting iPod®:
properly. . When the end of an index is reached
. Do not disconnect the connector while fast forwarding, fast forwarding
from an iPod® during iPod® operation. ends and play begins from the begin-
ning of the next index.
& To select a track/index from . When the beginning of an index is
its beginning reached while rewinding, rewinding
Select a track/index in the same way that ends and play begins from the begin-
a track is selected when a CD is played. ning of the index.
For details, refer to “To select a track from
its beginning” F5-26. & Repeating
& To select a chapter from its ! When connecting USB storage de-
beginning when connecting vice Each time you briefly press the “RPT/
iPod® Repeating is operated in the same way a RDM” button, the mode changes in the
While podcasts or audiobooks are playing, CD is played. For details, refer to “Re- following sequence.
select a chapter in the same way that a peating” F5-28.
track is selected when a CD is played. For
details, refer to “To select a track from its
NOTE
beginning” F5-26. . The “ALL RPT” indication refers to
the repeat playback of all indexes in the
& Fast-forwarding and fast-re- entire iPod®.
. The “SONG RPT” indication refers
versing to the repeat playback of a single index.
Fast forward or reverse is operated in the It repeats the index that is playing.
same way a CD is played. For details, . When an audiobook is playing, the
refer to “Fast-forwarding and fast-rever- mode does not change even if you
sing” F5-27. press the “RPT/RDM” button.
Audio 5-41
– CONTINUED –
5-44 Audio
– CONTINUED –
5-46 Audio
& Tips for the Hands-free sys- with it left in the breast pocket or bag. volume may be different from those of
tem cell phones currently used.
NOTE . When the ignition switch is turned to
! Bluetooth® . The Hands-free system may not the “LOCK” position during a call, the
operate properly under the following call may be disconnected or continued
conditions. on the cell phone depending on the
– The cell phone is turned off. type of cell phone that is used. Note
– The cell phone is not in the that operation of the cell phone may be
phone call area. necessary if the call is continued on the
– The battery of the cell phone has cell phone.
run down. . Do not speak at the same time as the
– The cell phone is not connected other party during a call. If you and the
to the Hands-free system. party speak at the same time, it may be
– The cell phone is behind the seat difficult for the other party to hear your
or in the glove box. voice and vice versa. This is normal.
– A metal material covers or . The receiver sound volume should
touches the cell phone. be set as low as possible. Otherwise,
NOTE . Depending on the type of cell phone the party you are calling may notice an
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are that is used, the screen on the cell undesirable echo sound.
registered trademarks of Bluetooth phone may remain illuminated while . Speak clearly and loudly.
SIG, Inc. the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Your voice may be difficult to be
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- heard by the party under the following
It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
nation off by adjusting the cell phone conditions.
in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
settings.
tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone – Driving on a rough road.
call from the in-vehicle equipment or take . Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving at a high speed.
an incoming phone call. phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving with a window open.
activated after making a call. Deacti-
Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a – When air from the ventilator
vate the automatic dial lock function of blows directly towards the micro-
connection between the in-vehicle equip-
the cell phone before using the Hands- phone.
ment and the cell phone can be made
free system.
without placing them in close proximity of – When the sound coming from the
each other. The cell phone can be used . Depending on the type of cell phone ventilator is loud.
that is used, operation and the sound
– CONTINUED –
5-48 Audio
– When the cell phone is too close Rules. Operation is subject to the equipment and receiver.
to the microphone. following two conditions: (1) this de- . Connect the equipment into an out-
. The sound quality may degrade due vice may not cause harmful interfer- let on a circuit different from that to
to the influence of the cell phone that is ence, and (2) this device must accept which the receiver is connected.
connected to the system or the circum- any interference received, including . Consult the dealer or an experi-
stances of the Bluetooth network. interference that may cause undesired enced radio/TV technician for help.
. When another Bluetooth® device is operation. . Changes or modifications not ex-
simultaneously connected, noise may pressly approved by the party respon-
be heard in the voice coming from the NOTE sible for compliance could void the
hands-free phone. This equipment has been tested and user’s authority to operate the equip-
found to comply with the limits for a ment.
! Corresponding profiles for the cell Class B digital device, pursuant to Part . This equipment complies with FCC/
phone 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are IC radiation exposure limits set forth
. HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0 designed to provide reasonable protec- for an uncontrolled equipment and
. OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1 tion against harmful interference in a meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
residential installation. This equipment Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
& Certification for the Hands- may cause harmful interference to to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
radio communications, if it is not frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
free system equipment has very low levels of RF
installed and used in accordance with
the instructions. However, there is no energy that it deemed to comply with-
CAUTION out maximum permissive exposure
guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
FCC WARNING
equipment does cause harmful inter- that it should be installed and operated
Changes or modifications not ex- keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or
ference to radio or television reception,
pressly approved by the party re- more away from person’s body (ex-
which can be determined by turning the
sponsible for compliance could void cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
equipment off and on, the user is
the user’s authority to operate the and ankles).
encouraged to try to correct the inter-
equipment. . This transmitter must not be co-
ference by one or more of the following
measures. located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
NOTE . Reorient or relocate the receiving
This device complies with Part 15 of antenna.
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC . Increase the separation between the
Audio 5-49
& Safety precautions . In the frequency band used by used by a movable body identifi-
this equipment, along with indus- cation device.
WARNING trial, scientific and medical
equipment such as a microwave
. For safety reasons, avoid operat- oven, radio stations (a license is & Using the Hands-free system
ing the cell phone while driving. required) to be used by the
production line in the factory to NOTE
. Do not make a phone call while
identify movable bodies, specific You can select the menus by operating
driving. When you have an in-
small power radio stations (a the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or using
coming call, stop the vehicle in a
license is not required) and ama- the voice command system. Refer to
safe location before taking the
teur radio stations (a license is “Menu list of the Hands-free system”
incoming phone call. When you
required) are being operated. F5-55 or “Voice command system”
have to absolutely take a phone
(These three types of radio sta- F5-58.
call, tell the caller “I’ll call you
back”. And then call the caller tions are hereinafter referred to
! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
back after stopping the vehicle in as “other radio stations.”) Before
a safe location. using this equipment, be sure to
check to see if “other radio
stations” are being operated in
CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
. Do not leave the cell phone in the equipment to “other radio sta-
vehicle. The temperature in the tions,” move the equipment to
vehicle may become extremely another location as soon as
high and cause a malfunction of possible to avoid radio interfer-
the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used
. When using the cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
method. The expected inflicting 1) OFF hook switch
too close to the in-vehicle equip- 2) ON hook switch
ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than
3) Talk switch
in tone quality or a poor connect- 33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses
ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
– CONTINUED –
5-50 Audio
OFF hook switch . To turn off the ! Updating phonebook data phone.
Hands-free mode, press the ON hook 6. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by
switch . ! Registering by voice operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
! Preparation for using the Hands- 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. press the talk switch .
free system 2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu. 7. Say the name (voice tag) to be
Before using the Hands-free system, it is 3. Select the “BY VOICE” menu. registered.
necessary to register a cell phone in the 4. Press the talk switch . 8. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
system. Perform the following procedure 5. Say the phone number to be regis- “STORED” is displayed and the mode
to register a cell phone. tered. changes to the registering speed dial
1. Press the OFF hook switch . mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
F5-51.
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by 7. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
Then “WELCOME!” will be displayed. ! Registering by inputting manually
press the talk switch .
3. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or 8. Say the name (voice tag) to be 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
the talk switch . registered. 2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu.
4. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu. 9. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then 3. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by
5. Say the name to be registered. “STORED” is displayed and the mode operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. After changes to the registering speed dial 4. Input the phone number to be regis-
“CAR M_MEDIA” is displayed, a pass key mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial” tered.
is displayed. F5-51. 5. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by
7. Input the displayed pass key into the operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
cell phone while “PKY: ****” is displayed. If ! Registering by phone press the talk switch .
you input the correct pass key, “PAIRED” 1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
is displayed and the registration proce- 2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu. registered.
dure is finished. If you input an incorrect 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
3. Select the “BY PHONE” menu.
pass key, “FAILED” is displayed and the “STORED” is displayed and the mode
registration procedure was not successful. 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
changes to the registering speed dial
“TRANSFER” is displayed.
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
5. Transfer the data from the cell phone. F5-51.
For details about transferring the data,
refer to the Owner’s Manual of the cell
Audio 5-51
NOTE 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ! Registering speed dial
While inputting the phone numbers, if 5. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by
1. After registering phonebook data, se-
“GO BACK” is chosen using the operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
lect the “SPEED DIAL” menu.
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial, the character press the talk switch .
that was input last is deleted. 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
registered.
! Registering from call history
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. “STORED” is displayed and the mode
2. Select the “ADD ENTRY” menu. changes to the registering speed dial
3. Select the “CALL HISTORY” menu. mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial”
4. Select “OUTGOING” or “INCOMING” F5-51.
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
5. Select the phone number by operating ! Registering from call back
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. 1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
6. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by 2. Select the phone number by operating
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
Preset buttons
press the talk switch . 3. Select the “STORE” menu.
7. Say the name (voice tag) to be 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 2. Press the preset button in which you
registered. 5. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu by want to register the phone number.
8. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
“STORED” is displayed and the mode press the talk switch . NOTE
changes to the registering speed dial 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be If the number to be used is already
mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial” registered. registered in speed dial, “OVER-
F5-51. 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then WRITE?” will be displayed.
“STORED” is displayed and the mode
! Registering from redial changes to the registering speed dial ! List names function
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. mode. Refer to “Registering speed dial” The voice tags registered in the phone-
2. Select the phone number by operating F5-51. book are spoken by using the list names
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. function. To use the list names function,
3. Select the “STORE” menu. perform the following procedure.
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu.
– CONTINUED –
5-52 Audio
phonebook data is deleted. the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. 3. Press the talk switch again.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu. 4. Say the desired phone number to be
! Deleting the speed dial 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then called.
1. Select the “PHONE BOOK” menu. “DELETED” is displayed and the selected 5. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
2. Select “DEL SPD DIAL” by operating redial data is deleted. OFF hook switch .
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or select
“DELETE SPEED DIAL” by using the ! Deleting the callback data ! Making a phone call from speed dial
voice command system. 1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu. It is possible to select a phone number
2. Select the phone number by operating from speed dial registered with the in-
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. Then
“DELETED” is displayed and the selected
callback data is deleted.
error message is indicated on the audio To decline an incoming call: Press the
screen. ON hook switch for more than 1.5
seconds.
! Redial
! Volume control
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
2. Select the desired number by operat-
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
OFF hook switch .
! Callback
1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
2. Select the desired number by operat- 1. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu.
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. 2. Select the desired number by operat-
3. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
OFF hook switch . 3. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
OFF hook switch . You can adjust the phone call volume, the
! Making a phone call from list name voice volume and the voice guidance
It is possible to select a phone number ! Top redial volume. Refer to “Volume control buttons”
from the list name registered with the in- 1. Press the OFF hook switch and F5-44.
vehicle equipment to make a phone call. load the outgoing call history. ! Adjustable level of each volume
2. Select the “DIAL” menu or press the
OFF hook switch . Volume Range Initial setting
Phone call 0 to 14 7
! Taking a phone call and declining
an incoming call Voice 0 to 14 7
To take a phone call: Press the OFF Voice guidance 0 to 6 3
hook switch .
To put an incoming call on hold: Press
the ON hook switch briefly.
Audio 5-55
– CONTINUED –
5-56 Audio
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
Audio 5-57
*: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
– CONTINUED –
5-58 Audio
38 security sécurité
& Bluetooth® setting inputted PIN code is correct, “LOCKED” is
displayed and the phonebook is locked.
jumeler le télé- ! Security setting
39 pair phone phone
! Setting PIN code NOTE
40 change name modifier le nom
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is While the phonebook is locked, if the
sélectionner le tél- operation restricted menu is selected,
41 select phone éphone used when locking the phonebook.
1. Select the “SETUP” menu. “PHBK LOCK” is displayed.
42 list phones lister les télé-
phones 2. Select the “SECURITY” menu. ! Unlocking the phonebook
configurer le 3. Select the “SET PIN” menu. Then
43 set pass key “CURRENT PIN?” is displayed. 1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
passe-partout
4. Input the current PIN code by operat- 2. Select the “SECURITY” menu.
44 add entry ajouter l’entrée 3. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK” menu by
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying
45 delete entry supprimer l’entrée the number. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
supprimer compo- 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. say “PHONEBOOK UNLOCK”. Then
46 delete speed dial sition abrégée “CURRENT PIN?” is displayed.
6. Input the new PIN code by operating
47 by voice vocalement the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the NOTE
48 by phone par téléphone number. If the phonebook is not locked, “UN-
49 call history historique d’appels 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. LOCK” is displayed and the mode
changes to the security mode.
50 set speed dial configurer compo- ! Locking the phonebook
sition abrégée 4. Input the PIN code by operating the
51 incoming entrant 1. Select the “SETUP” menu. “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the
2. Select the “SECURITY” menu. number.
52 outgoing sortant
3. Select “PHBK LOCK” by operating the 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. If the
53 list names lister les noms “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or say “PHONE- inputted PIN code is correct, “UN-
54 set PIN configurer NIP BOOK LOCK”. Then “CURRENT PIN?” is LOCKED” is displayed and the phone-
verrouiller le regis- displayed. book is unlocked.
55 phone book lock tre 4. Input the PIN code by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the
number.
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. If the
– CONTINUED –
5-60 Audio
! Phone setup displayed and the mode changes to the . “SELECT PHONE” to connect the
“PHONE SETUP” mode. selected cell phone
! Setting pair phone 4. Select the cell phone by operating the . “CHANGE NAME” to change the voice
Refer to “Preparation for using the Hands- “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the tag
free system” F5-50. voice tag. . “DELETE” to delete the selected cell
! Selecting phone 5. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu. phone from the list
6. Register the voice tag. For details, . “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE
To select the registered cell phone for
refer to “Preparation for using the Hands- SETUP” mode
connecting to the in-vehicle equipment,
free system” F5-50.
perform the following procedure.
! Setting passkey
1. Select the “SETUP” menu. ! List phones function
2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu. 1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu.
3. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu. If phone list are spoken by using the list
no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is 3. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu.
phones function. After the currently set passkey is dis-
displayed and the mode changes to the
1. Select the “SETUP” menu. played, a new passkey can be entered.
“PHONE SETUP” mode.
2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu. 4. Input the new passkey by operating
4. Select the cell phone by operating the
“TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the 3. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu. If the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or saying the
voice tag. no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is passkey.
displayed and the mode changes to the 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. The new
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. “SE-
“PHONE SETUP” mode. passkey is displayed, the passkey is
LECTED” is displayed, the selected cell
phone is connected to the in-vehicle 4. Registered cell phones are displayed changed and the mode changes to the
equipment and the mode changes to the on the saved side. While displayed, if the “PHONE SETUP” mode.
“PHONE SETUP” mode. “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial is turned, the
next registered cell phone is displayed. ! Deleting registered cell phone from
! Changing the voice tag of the cell Press the ON hook button to close the the list
phone Hands-free menu.
1. Select the “SETUP” menu.
5. Select a cell phone by operating the
1. Select the “SETUP” menu. “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or pressing the 2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu.
2. Select the “PHONE SETUP” menu. talk switch . Then “SELECTED” is 3. Select the “DELETE” menu.
3. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu. If displayed. 4. Select a cell phone to be deleted by
no cell phones are registered, “EMPTY” is 6. Select the following menus. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
Audio 5-61
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Interior equipment
Interior lights . The doors or the rear gate (5-door) are . Models without genuine SUBARU
unlocked using the remote keyless entry navigation system:
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the transmitter. The setting can be changed by a
lights are turned off to avoid battery . The ignition switch is turned from the SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
discharge. “Acc” position to the “LOCK” position. dealer for details.
& Dome light The automatically illuminated dome light & Cargo area light (5-door
remains on for several seconds and then
gradually turns off after all doors and the
models)
rear gate (5-door) are closed.
While the light is illuminated, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
dome light turns off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to “Acc” or “ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the light
1) ON remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
2) DOOR changed as follows. ON position: The light illuminates when
3) OFF . Models with genuine SUBARU navi- the rear gate is opened. The light remains
The dome light switch has the following gation system: illuminated for several seconds and gra-
three positions. The setting can be changed using the dually turns off after the rear gate is
navigation monitor. For details, please closed.
ON: The light remains on continuously. refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement OFF position: The light remains off.
OFF: The light remains off. for the navigation system. Also, the setting
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
matically in the following cases. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate (5-
door) is opened.
Interior equipment 6-3
& Map lights When leaving the vehicle, make sure the following operations are performed, the
lights are turned off to avoid battery map lights turn off immediately.
discharge. . The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
NOTE position.
For the type A map lights, although the . All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
light switches are in the ON position, locked using the remote keyless entry
the lights are automatically turned off transmitter.
after approximately 30 seconds of
illumination to prevent the vehicle The setting of the period for which the
battery from discharging. For details, lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
refer to “Battery drainage prevention changed as follows.
function” F2-5. . Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
gation system:
! Automatic illumination (models
Type A with moonroof) The setting can be changed using the
navigation monitor. For details, please
The map lights illuminate automatically in refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
the following cases. for the navigation system. Also, the setting
. Any of the doors other than the rear can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
gate is opened. (The map lights do not Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
illuminate when only the rear gate is . Models without genuine SUBARU
opened.) navigation system:
. The doors are unlocked using the The setting can be changed by a
remote keyless entry transmitter. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
. The ignition switch is turned from the dealer for details.
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
Type B
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
To turn on the map light, push the switch. closed.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
While the lights are on, if any of the
6-4 Interior equipment
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
1) Lock
CAUTION
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
2) Unlock Do not pick up a cup from the cup
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To & Coin tray (if equipped) holder or put a cup in the holder
close it, push the lid firmly upward. while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
– CONTINUED –
6-6 Interior equipment
! Except STI console near the parking brake lever. cups of different sizes to be held.
A dual cup holder is built in the center To access the cup holder, pull the lid NOTE
console, beside the parking brake lever. toward the rear. With the divider taken out, the cup
! STI holder can be used as a storage box.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder Bottle holders trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
(if equipped) and other items.
CAUTION CAUTION
When not in use, always keep the . Do not pick up a bottle from the
cup holder stored while driving to bottle holder or put a bottle in the
reduce the risk of injury in the event holder while you are driving, as
of a sudden stop or an accident. this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you.
tight for the accessory power & Use with a cigarette lighter (if uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
outlet, this can result in a poor equipped) plug. Do not use a non-genuine
contact or cause the plug to get To use the accessory power outlet below cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
stuck. Only use plugs that fit the climate control as a cigarette lighter et. Doing so may cause a short-
properly. socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, circuit and overheating, resulting
. Use of an electric appliance in the which is an optional accessory. A cigarette in a fire.
accessory power outlet for a long lighter plug is available from your . If the socket is ever used for a
period of time while the engine is SUBARU dealer. plug-in accessory such as a cell
not running can cause battery The cigarette lighter operates only when phone, that may damage the
discharge. the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” portion of the socket’s internal
. Before driving your vehicle, make position. mechanism that causes a cigar-
sure that the plug and the cord ette lighter plug to “pop out”
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
on your electrical appliance will after its lighter element is heated.
knob and wait a few moments. It will
not interfere with your shifting Therefore, do not place a cigar-
automatically spring up when ready for
gears and operating the accel- ette lighter plug in a socket that
use.
erator and brake pedals. If they has been used, even once, to
do, do not use the electrical WARNING power a plug-in accessory. Doing
appliance while driving. so may cause the plug to stick
To avoid being burned, never grasp and overheat, creating a potential
the lighter by the end with the fire hazard.
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket lo-
cated in the center console is
originally designed to use a gen-
6-10 Interior equipment
Ashtray (if equipped) & Portable ashtray & Rear ashtray (STI – if
equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette butt and start a fire. each cup holder. For the locations of the The rear ashtray is located on the upper
. Do not put flammable material in cup holders, refer to “Cup holders” F6-5. side of the back of the center console. To
the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette ashtray. When removing the ashtray from the lid.
butts in the ashtray. a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- and pull it out while pushing the inner plate
mulate around the hinges of the ash- down.
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
Interior equipment 6-11
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
CAUTION
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is
side floor.
placed back in its proper location
The floor mat is secured using the built-in and correctly secured on its retain-
grommets, by placing the grommets over ing pins. Also, do not use more than
the pins and pushing them downward. one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during A shopping bag hook is attached to each
driving, it could cause an accident. side of the cargo area.
6-12 Interior equipment
Under-floor storage compart- the floor of the trunk (4-door) or the cargo
area (5-door), and it can be used to store
ment (if equipped) small items. To open the lid, pull the tab
up.
NOTE
. The shape of the storage compart-
ment may be different depending on
the model.
. When storing a flat tire, put the
storage tray in the trunk (4-door) or
the cargo area (5-door).
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
4-door models driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
5-door models
The storage compartment is located under
Starting and operating
Vehicle Dynamics Control system .................... 7-34 Hill start assist system (MT models – if
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-36 equipped) ........................................................ 7-42
Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch (STI) ...... 7-36 To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist system
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (except (STI) ................................................................ 7-42
STI).................................................................. 7-37 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light .................................................. 7-44
(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-38 Cruise control .................................................... 7-44
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-40 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-44
Parking brake..................................................... 7-40 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-46
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-40 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-46
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-46
Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-47
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-47
Starting and operating 7-3
Fuel If other gasoline (lower than 91 AKI (95 vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
RON)) is used, knocking, reduced out- ! Unleaded gasoline
put and poor accelerator response will
result. The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
CAUTION
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
Use of a fuel which is low in quality ! STI nozzle. Under no circumstances should
or use of an inappropriate fuel The engine is designed to operate at leaded gasoline be used because it will
additive may cause engine damage. maximum performance using unleaded damage the emission control system and
gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI may impair driveability and fuel economy.
(98 RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) ! Gasoline for California-certified
& Fuel requirements fuel is not readily available in your area, LEV
! Non-turbo models unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of If your vehicle was certified to California’s
91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
The engine is designed to operate using detriment to engine durability or driveabil-
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
ity. However, you may notice a slight it is designed to optimize engine and
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. decrease in maximum engine perfor- emission performance with gasoline that
! Turbo models mance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel. meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
! Except STI your warranty coverage. any other state than California, your
The engine is designed to operate using ! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
premium unleaded gasoline with an Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher
higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
not available, regular unleaded gasoline numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
or higher may be temporarily used. For Using a gasoline with a lower octane smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
optimum engine performance and drive- rating can cause persistent and heavy a different brand of unleaded gasoline
ability, it is required that you use premium knocking, which can damage the engine. having lower sulfur to determine if the
grade unleaded gasoline. Do not be concerned if your vehicle problem is fuel related before returning
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
NOTE up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact service.
Be sure to use premium unleaded your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with
gasoline of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher. the specified octane rating and your
– CONTINUED –
7-4 Starting and operating
! MMT your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
you use such fuels, your emission control now producing reformulated gasolines,
system performance may deteriorate and which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Limited Warranty.
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
determined that the condition is caused you should ask your service station CAUTION
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
be covered by your warranty. surfaces of the vehicle. Because
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
! Gasoline for cleaner air sions. fuel may damage the paint, be sure
Your use of gasoline with detergent to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU
This helps keep your engine in tune and following description. Limited Warranty.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual. & Fuel filler lid and cap
high quality fuel with the proper detergent . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
and other additives, you should never ! Refueling
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
need to add any fuel system cleaning Methanol can be used in your vehicle Only one person should be involved in
agents to your fuel tank. ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel refueling. Do not allow others to approach
mixture AND if it is accompanied by the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
Many gasolines are now blended with sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- pipe while refueling is in progress.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these vents and corrosion inhibitors required to Be sure to observe any other precautions
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not that are posted at the service station.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol under these conditions.
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
Starting and operating 7-5
WARNING NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
. When refueling, insert the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
nozzle securely into the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not the vehicle.
fully inserted, its automatic stop- . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
ping mechanism may not func- until it clicks or if the tether is caught
tion, causing fuel to overflow the under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
tank and creating a fire hazard. warning light/malfunction indicator
. Stop refueling when the auto- lamp may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
matic stop mechanism on the ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- dicator lamp” F3-16.
tinue to add fuel, temperature
3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder changes or other conditions CAUTION
inside the fuel filler lid (turbo models). may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard. . Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler cleaning agent may cause da-
pump automatically stops. Do not add any mage to the fuel system.
more fuel. . After refueling, turn the cap to the
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise right until it clicks to ensure that
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not to catch the tether under the cap while not securely tightened, fuel may
tightening. leak out while the vehicle is being
7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, creating a fire hazard.
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged. . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
4. Hook the cord that is attached to the surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel fuel may damage the paint, be
filler lid (non-turbo models). sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
Starting and operating 7-7
spilled fuel is not covered under State emission testing (U.S. test.
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. only) The U.S. Environmental Protection
. Always use a genuine SUBARU Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
fuel filler cap. If you use the At state inspection time, remember to dynamometers in their emission testing
wrong cap, it may not fit or have tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
proper venting and your fuel tank advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the
and emission control system AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel
may be damaged. It could also ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer.
lead to fuel spillage and a fire. sion damage will result.
There are some states that use four-wheel
. Immediately put fuel in the tank Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs.
whenever the low fuel warning ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will
light illuminates. Engine misfires in order to meet their obligation under not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.
as a result of an empty tank federal law to implement stricter vehicle
could cause damage to the en- emission standards to reduce air pollution Under no circumstances should the rear
gine. from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread- wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
mill or roller-like testing device that allows should the driveshaft be disconnected for
your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the state emission testing.
vehicle remains in one place. Depending
on the severity of a state’s air pollution WARNING
problems, the states must adopt either a
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
must NEVER be performed on a
inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
basic emission test consists of an emis-
tempting to do so will result in
sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
may cause an accident or injuries to
for a short period of time. States with more
persons nearby.
severe air pollution problems are required
to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
test. This test simulates actual driving
conditions on a dynamometer and permits
more accurate measurement of tailpipe
emitted pollution than the basic emission
– CONTINUED –
7-8 Starting and operating
Starting the engine & MT models the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
position and wait for at least 10
1. Apply the parking brake. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
CAUTION 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- erator pedal and turn the ignition
cessories. switch to the “START” position. If the
Do not operate the starter motor 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor engine starts, quickly release the
continuously for more than 10 sec- and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold accelerator pedal.
onds. If the engine fails to start after the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
operating the starter for 5 to 10 the engine. the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds
more before trying again. the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
floor. “START” position without depressing
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
. It may be difficult to start the engine warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
when the battery has been discon- “Warning and indicator lights” F3-13. for assistance.
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
culty is caused by the electronically
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
function. To overcome it, keep the
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up.
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before following.
starting the engine. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the & AT models
. For non-turbo models, to protect the “OFF” position and wait for at least 1. Apply the parking brake.
engine while the shift lever is in the 10 seconds. After checking that the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
neutral position (MT models)/select parking brake is firmly set, turn the
cessories.
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (AT ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal 3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
models), the engine is controlled so position (preferably the “P” position).
that the engine speed may not become slightly (approximately a quarter of the
too high even if the accelerator pedal is full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when
depressed hard. pedal as soon as the engine starts. the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start, Stopping the engine
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13. for assistance. The ignition switch should be turned off
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator only when the vehicle is stopped and the
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has engine is idling.
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the WARNING
engine warms up.
If the engine does not start, try the Do not stop the engine when the
following. While the engine is warming up, make vehicle is moving. This will cause
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the sure that the select lever is at the “P” or loss of power to the power steering
“OFF” position and wait for at least “N” position and that the parking brake is and the brake booster, making steer-
10 seconds. After checking that the applied. ing and braking more difficult. It
parking brake is firmly set, turn the could also result in accidental acti-
ignition switch to the “START” position CAUTION vation of the “LOCK” position on the
while depressing the accelerator pedal ignition switch, causing the steering
slightly (approximately a quarter of the If you restart the engine while the wheel to lock.
full stroke). Release the accelerator vehicle is moving, shift the select
pedal as soon as the engine starts. lever into the “N” position. Do not
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn attempt to place the select lever of a
the ignition switch back to the “OFF” moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
position and wait for at least 10 tion.
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Starting and operating 7-11
Remote engine start system an additional four times. If the vehicle fails
to start after the additional attempts, the
(dealer option) remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non-activated state.
WARNING
& Remote start safety features
. Do not start the engine using the For safety and security reasons, the
remote start system in an en- system will fail to start and beep the horn
closed environment (e.g., in a twice or shut down the engine during
closed garage). Prolonged opera- remote start operation if any of the
tion of a motor vehicle in an following conditions occur.
enclosed environment can cause
. The brake pedal is depressed before
a harmful build-up of Carbon
the vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”.
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure & Starting your vehicle . The key was already in the ignition
to high levels of Carbon Monox- switch.
The remote engine start system is acti- . The engine hood is opened.
ide can cause headaches, dizzi- vated by pressing the “ ” button twice
ness or in extreme cases uncon- within 3 seconds on your remote engine . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
sciousness and/or death. start transmitter. The system will check reached a level over 3,000 rpm.
. Before performing any servicing certain pre-conditions before starting, and . The alarm is triggered by opening a
of the vehicle, temporarily place if all safety parameters are correct, the door or the rear gate.
the remote engine start system in engine will start within 5 seconds. While
service mode to prevent the the vehicle is operating via remote engine
NOTE
system from unexpectedly start- start, the vehicle’s power window features . The security indicator light on the
ing the engine. will be disabled. Also, the system has a combination meter will stop flashing
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if while under remote engine start opera-
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and tion, but the vehicle is still protected.
hold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again to . If the vehicle is entered during
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter remote engine start operation, the
cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the
stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history.
power off then attempt to start the vehicle
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating
& Entering the vehicle while it transmitter within a few seconds immedi- start.
is running via remote start ately following remote engine start shut- ! To disengage the service mode
down.
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi- position, depress and hold the brake
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling pedal, then press and release the “ ”
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
the interior of the vehicle button on the remote engine start trans-
trigger and the remote engine start system Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- mitter three times. The system will pause
will turn off. Inserting the key into the perature controls to the desired setting for 1 second and flash the turn signal
ignition switch and turning it to the “ON” and operation. After the system starts the lights once indicating that the system has
position or pressing the unlock button “ ” vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will exited service mode.
on the remote keyless entry transmitter activate and heat or cool the interior to
will disarm the alarm system. Refer to your setting. NOTE
“Alarm system” F2-16. When taking your vehicle in for service,
2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the & Service mode it is recommended that you inform the
brake pedal. In service mode, the remote start function service personnel that your vehicle is
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch is temporarily disabled to prevent the equipped with a remote engine start
and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition system from unexpectedly starting the system.
switch is accidentally turned to the engine while being serviced.
“START” position, the system’s “starter ! To engage the service mode & Remote engine start trans-
anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter mitter programming and pro-
from re-cranking. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
grammable feature option
4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote New transmitters can be programmed to
starter disengages, the vehicle’s power pedal, then press and release the “ ”
button on the remote engine start trans- the remote engine start system in the
window features are re-enabled and the event that remote engine start transmitters
vehicle will operate normally. mitter three times. The system will pause
for 1 second and then flash the turn signal are lost, stolen or damaged. The remote
lights and honk the horn three times engine start system also has one pro-
& Entering the vehicle follow- indicating that the system is in service grammable feature that can be adjusted
ing remote engine start shut- mode. When attempting to activate the for user preference.
down remote start system while in service The remote engine start system can be
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is mode, the turn signal lights will flash and programmed to either make an audible
opened by the remote keyless entry the horn will honk two times and will not horn chirp upon remote start activation or
Starting and operating 7-13
not. Remote engine start transmitter pro- the turn signal lights will flash 2 times to an incorrect replacement battery
gramming and feature programming can indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are is used. Replace only with the
be adjusted using the following procedure. “ON”. Depressing the brake pedal repeat- same or equivalent type of bat-
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s edly will toggle the feature ON or OFF tery.
door must remain opened throughout the each time. . Batteries should not be exposed
entire process). 7. To exit the remote engine start trans- to excessive heat such as sun-
2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition mitter and feature programming mode, shine, fire or the like.
switch and turn to the “ON” position. turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
3. Locate the small black programming position, remove the key from the ignition The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
button behind the fuse box cover, on the switch and test operation of the remote CR-1220) supplied in your remote engine
driver’s side left under the dashboard engine start transmitter(s) and horn con- start transmitter should last approximately
panel. firmation feature. 3 years, depending on usage. When the
4. Press and hold the black programming batteries begin to weaken, you will notice
button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will & System maintenance a decrease in range (distance from the
honk and the turn signal lights will flash vehicle that your remote engine start
! Changing the batteries system operates). Follow the instructions
three times to indicate that the system has
entered programming mode. At this point below to change the remote engine start
you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6.
CAUTION transmitter batteries.
5. To program a remote engine start . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
transmitter: press and release the “ ” or in the remote engine start
button on each transmitter. The horn will transmitter when replacing the
honk and the turn signal lights will flash battery.
one time to indicate a successful trans- . Be careful not to damage the
mitter learn each time the “ ” button is printed circuit board in the re-
pressed. You can program up to eight mote engine start transmitter
transmitters. when replacing the battery.
6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
ON/OFF: depress and release the brake . Be careful not to allow children to
pedal to toggle the feature. The horn will touch the battery and any re-
chirp and the turn signal lights will flash moved parts; children could
one time to indicate Confirmation Horn swallow them.
Chirps are “OFF”. The horn will honk and . There is a danger of explosion if
– CONTINUED –
7-14 Starting and operating
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
1. Carefully pry the remote engine start 2. Remove the circuit board from the any interference received, including
transmitter halves apart using a small flat- bottom half of the case and slide the white interference that may cause undesired
head screwdriver. plastic battery holder out from under the operation.
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign
on the old batteries before removing them
to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote engine start
system.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
Starting and operating 7-15
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
– CONTINUED –
7-16 Starting and operating
– CONTINUED –
7-18 Starting and operating
1) LSD torque
2) Traction torque
3) Initial LSD torque (maximum) In the auto mode, the system estimates
4) Initial LSD torque (minimum) the driving and road conditions using
A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable) signals from the wheel speed sensor,
B) Mechanical LSD torque throttle position sensor, steering angle
sensor and brake switch, etc. According
The driver’s control center differential has to the result, it electronically and auto-
an auto mode and a manual mode. In the matically controls the degree of limitation
auto mode, the system automatically Press the “AUTO-MANU” switch on the
center console to switch from auto mode of the differential action (LSD torque) to
adjusts the initial LSD torque. In the optimize the differential action of the
manual mode, you can change to the to manual mode or vice versa. When you
select the auto mode, the “AUTO” indica- center differential. When the ignition
desired mode manually by using the switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator
center differential control switch. tor light illuminates. When you select the
manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator light light on the combination meter illuminates.
NOTE turns off.
If you rapidly depress and release the
accelerator pedal while driving at low
speed, you may hear a knocking sound
from the vicinity of the center differen-
– CONTINUED –
7-20 Starting and operating
The auto mode has 3 modes as follows. the “AUTO [+]” mode. After setting the & Manual mode
mode, “ ” on the combination meter
Mode Operation illuminates.
AUTO [+] This mode emphasizes traction
control and strengthens the
limitation of differential action
that is suitable for driving on
slippery roads for vehicle stabi-
lity.
AUTO This mode is suitable for most
driving situations.
AUTO [−] This mode is suitable when you
seek quick response from the
steering wheel and smooth
driving.
! Mode setting method In the manual mode, you can use the
center differential control switch to adjust
In most situations, it is recommended that Pull the control switch rearward to select the initial LSD torque as desired. When
the “AUTO” mode is selected. the “AUTO [−]” mode. After setting the this mode is selected, the “AUTO” indica-
mode, “ ” on the combination meter tor light on the combination meter turns
illuminates. off.
When the “AUTO [+]” mode is selected,
pull the control switch rearward to change
to the “AUTO” mode. When the “AUTO
[−]” mode is set, push the control switch
forward to change to the “AUTO” mode.
Push the switch forward to increase the Pull the switch rearward to reduce the
initial LSD torque; when the “LOCK” initial LSD torque. When the lowest posi-
The control switch is located beside the indicator light illuminates, the initial LSD tion of the driver’s control center differen-
parking brake lever. By pushing the torque setting is maximum. The center tial indicator light illuminates, the initial
control switch forward or pulling it rear- differential will then be almost completely LSD torque will be minimum. Under this
ward, it is possible to change the initial locked. condition, only the Mechanical LSD torque
LSD torque. will limit the differential action.
The center differential indicator lights on CAUTION
the combination meter give six levels of
indication. The indicator lights and control . Do not operate the control switch
switch are linked; when the switch is when a wheel slippage occurs.
pushed or pulled to change the initial Wait until the wheelspin has been
LSD torque, the illumination position of the brought under control.
indicator lights changes accordingly.
. Under any of the following con-
ditions after setting to the man-
ual mode, pull the center differ-
ential control switch to minimize
the initial LSD torque:
– CONTINUED –
7-22 Starting and operating
. When a temporary spare tire is cause a braking effect accompanied by Automatic transmission
installed vibration and noise. This does not
indicate a problem. The phenomenon The automatic transmission is electroni-
. When your vehicle is towed
will disappear when setting the initial cally controlled and provides 4 forward
. When the vehicle is stopped LSD torque to the minimum. speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
with the manual mode se- In the auto mode, it controls the initial manual mode and a SPORT mode.
lected LSD torque automatically. While in the
auto mode, this phenomenon some- WARNING
times occurs depending on the driving
NOTE condition, however, it does not indicate Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
. A higher initial LSD torque setting a problem. position into the “D” or “R” position
gives the vehicle greater traction when . Use the center differential indicator while depressing the accelerator
driving straight ahead but makes cor- light only as a rough indication of the pedal. This may cause the vehicle
nering more difficult. Remember this initial LSD torque. to jump forward or backward.
when adjusting the initial LSD torque. . If you operate the center differential
In general, higher initial LSD torque control switch while quickly accelerat-
settings assist driving on slippery ing or turning a tight corner, you may CAUTION
roads and lower settings for non-slip- feel slight shocks. This is due to
pery roads. When the vehicle is stuck . Shift into the “P” or “R” position
differential action by the center differ- only after the vehicle is comple-
in snow or mud, setting the initial LSD ential and does not indicate a problem.
torque to the maximum will help to free tely stopped. Shifting while the
the vehicle. vehicle is moving may cause
. The setting of the initial LSD torque & Temporary release damage to the transmission.
will remain even when the auto mode is When the driver stops the vehicle and . Do not race the engine for more
selected or the ignition switch is turned pulls the parking brake lever after manu- than 5 seconds in any position
to the “OFF” position. However, the ally setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD except the “N” or “P” position
initial LSD torque will be minimized torque is temporarily minimized. However when the brake is set or when
when the battery is disconnected and the indicator on the combination meter chocks are used in the wheels.
reconnected. continues to show the driver’s selected This may cause the automatic
. During cornering or when making initial LSD torque. When the driver re- transmission fluid to overheat.
turns (especially when going into the leases the parking brake lever, the initial . Avoid shifting from one of the
garage), the rotational difference be- LSD torque set by the driver is restored. forward driving positions into the
tween the front and rear wheels may
Starting and operating 7-23
“R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current
! P (Park)
stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
cause damage to the transmis- shifting will be restored as the vehicle This position is for parking the vehicle and
sion. continues to be driven for a while. starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me-
. When parking the vehicle, first
& Select lever chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
securely apply the parking brake
from rolling freely.
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Avoid parking When you park the vehicle, first set the
for a long time with the select parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
lever in any other position as position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
doing so could result in a dead the transmission.
battery.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
NOTE brake pedal fully then move the select
. When the engine coolant tempera- lever. This prevents the vehicle from
ture is still low, the automatic transmis- lurching when it is started.
sion will upshift to higher engine ! R (Reverse)
speeds than when the coolant tempera- This position is for backing the vehicle.
ture is sufficiently high in order to : Shifting is possible with the brake pedal
shorten the warm-up time and improve depressed. To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
driveability. The gearshift timing will : Shifting is possible whether the brake the vehicle completely then move the
automatically shift to the normal timing pedal is depressed or not. However, lever to the “R” position.
after the engine has warmed up. while the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
or “Acc” position, shifting is not possible ! N (Neutral)
. Immediately after ATF (automatic if the brake pedal is not depressed.
transmission fluid) is replaced, you Depress the brake pedal and move the
This position is for restarting a stalled
may feel that the automatic transmis- select lever. engine.
sion operation is somewhat unusual. : Shifting is possible whether the brake In this position the wheels and transmis-
This results from invalidation of data pedal is depressed or not. sion are not locked. In this position, the
which the on-board computer has The select lever has four positions, “P”, transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
collected and stored in memory to “R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for freely, even on the slightest incline unless
– CONTINUED –
7-24 Starting and operating
the parking brake or foot brake is applied. When more acceleration is required in this may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend-
Avoid coasting with the transmission in position, depress the accelerator pedal ing on how hard you depress the brake
neutral. fully to the floor and hold that position. The pedal, causing engine braking to work.
During coasting, there is no engine brak- transmission will automatically downshift Reacceleration for a short time will cause
ing effect. to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the transmission to upshift normally.
the pedal, the transmission will return to
WARNING the original gear position. NOTE
To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever . A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift
Do not drive the vehicle with the from this position into the manual gate. To will not occur at speeds above 50
select lever in the “N” (neutral) use the manual mode, move the lever mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-
position. Engine braking has no from this position into the manual gate matic downshift will not occur at
effect in this condition and the risk then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends. speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
of an accident is consequently in- . Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd
creased. ! While climbing a grade may occur even when driving on a level
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to road depending on conditions, such as
4th gear is prevented from taking place how hard you depress the brake pedal.
NOTE when the accelerator is released. This
If the select lever is in the “N” position minimizes the chance of subsequent
when you stop the engine for parking,
& Shift lock function
downshifting to a lower gear when accel-
you may not subsequently be able to erating again. This prevents repeated The shift lock function helps prevent the
move it to the “R” or “P” position. If upshifting and downshifting resulting in a improper operation of the select lever.
this happens, turn the ignition switch to smoother operation of the vehicle. . The select lever cannot be operated
the “ON” position. You will then be able unless the ignition switch is turned to the
to move the select lever to the “P” NOTE “ON” position and the brake pedal is
position. For details, refer to “Shift lock The transmission may downshift to 2nd depressed.
function” F7-24. or 1st gear, depending on the way the . The select lever cannot be moved from
accelerator pedal is depressed to ac- the “P” position to any other position
! D (Drive) celerate the vehicle again. before the brake pedal is depressed.
This position is for normal driving. Depress the brake pedal first, and then
The transmission automatically shifts into ! While going down a hill operate the select lever.
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to When you are descending a hill or any . Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the vehicle speed and the acceleration other slope while braking with the the key from the “Acc” position to the
you require. “SPORT” mode selected, the transmission
Starting and operating 7-25
“LOCK” position and remove the key from If you must perform the above procedure, cover.
the ignition key cylinder. the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
. If the ignition switch is turned to the system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a NOTE
“LOCK” position while the select lever is in SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon To prevent damage to the shift lock
the “N” position, the select lever may not as possible. cover, cover the tip of the flat-head
be moved to the “P” position after a period screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth
If the select lever does not move after before removing the cover.
of time. Therefore, move the select lever performing the above procedure, refer to
to the “P” position with the brake pedal “Shift lock release using the shift lock
depressed soon after the ignition switch is release button” F7-25.
turned to the “LOCK” position.
! Shift lock release using the shift
! Shift lock release lock release button
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn Perform the following procedure to release
the ignition switch back to the “ON” the shift lock.
position then move the select lever to the 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
“P” position with the brake pedal de- engine.
pressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
. When the select lever cannot be insert a screwdriver into the hole, press
shifted from “P” to “N”: the shift lock release button using a
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift screwdriver, and then move the select
lock release button” F7-25. lever.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”: If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tion switch in the “Acc” position, move the
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
select lever to the “R” or “P” position with 2. Remove the shift lock cover using a as soon as possible.
the brake pedal depressed. flat-head screwdriver. The shift lock re-
lease button is located under the shift lock
– CONTINUED –
7-26 Starting and operating
Gear shifts can be performed by using the ! Using the paddle shift (if equipped) Also, if you subsequently ease off the
select lever (all models) or the paddle shift accelerator pedal and then accelerate
switch behind the steering wheel (if again, the transmission will automatically
equipped). switch back from manual mode to normal
mode.
! Using the select lever
CAUTION
The paddle shift lever could be
accidentally changed if accessories
or other materials are placed on the
paddle shift. Do not place acces-
sories and other materials on the
paddle shift lever.
Pull the “+” of the paddle shift to upshift
one level. Pull the “−” of the paddle shift to & Driving tips
downshift one level.
. On a road surface where there is a risk
To deselect the manual mode, return the of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly select lever to the “D” position from the gravel-covered road), you can pull away
pushing the select lever toward the “+” manual gate. from a standstill (safely and easily) by first
end of the manual gate. While driving, if you change the gear by selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly paddle shifting, the gear position indicator mode.
pulling the select lever toward the “−” illuminates and shows the current gear . Always apply the foot or parking brake
end of the manual gate. condition. At this time, the normal mode when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
temporarily changes to the manual mode, “R” position.
and after driving for a short period of time, . Always set the parking brake when
the transmission mode returns to the parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
normal mode. (The timing of the gear vehicle with only the transmission.
change and return is different, depending . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
on the driving condition when paddle position on an uphill grade by using the
shifting.) “D” position. Use the brake instead.
– CONTINUED –
7-28 Starting and operating
This is ideal for around-town driving and & Sport (S) mode & Sport Sharp (S#) mode
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult ! For all-around performance driving ! For maximum performance driving
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
power desired by those who want to make Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
the driving experience their own personal level of engine performance and control.
When Intelligent (I) mode is selected, a adventure. The throttle becomes more responsive
shift-up indicator “ ” on the combination The linear acceleration characteristic of regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
meter will blink to signal the best time to this versatile mode is ideal for normal maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
shift gears for maximum fuel efficiency. driving use. ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
– CONTINUED –
7-30 Starting and operating
& SI-DRIVE selector the same mode as when the engine Limited slip differential (LSD)
was turned off.
When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to
. While the engine is running, if the
(STI)
the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode
changes to Sport (S) mode. When you CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- The LSD provides optimum distribution of
rotate it to the right, the mode changes to tion indicator lamp illuminates, the SI- power according to the difference in
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, and when you DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) revolutions between the right and left
push it, the mode changes to Intelligent (I) mode. In this case, it is not possible to wheels that may be caused by certain
mode. After performing this operation, the change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or driving conditions, thereby improving driv-
switch returns to its original location. Intelligent (I) mode. ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or
. If there is a possibility that the other slippery roads or when high speed
engine could overheat because of a driving.
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to CAUTION
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, . Never start the engine while a tire
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when on one side is jacked up, as the
the engine coolant temperature in- vehicle may move.
creases. . If one tire is spinning in mud,
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators avoid continued spinning at high
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be speed as this could adversely
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU affect the LSD.
dealer.
. If you use a temporary spare tire
NOTE to replace a flat tire, be sure to
. The next time you turn on the use the original temporary spare
engine, after you turned off the engine tire stored in the vehicle. Using
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI- other sizes will adversely affect
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) the LSD.
mode.
. The next time you turn on the
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in
Starting and operating 7-31
! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
assist system is operating properly.
tem)
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener- The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. wheels which may occur during sudden
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear the sound of ABS braking or braking on slippery road sur-
brings more braking ability to the operating from the engine compart- faces. This helps prevent the loss of
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- ment. steering control and directional stability
ity. Always use the utmost care caused by wheel lock-up.
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance. & Disc brake pad wear warning When the ABS system is operating, you
indicators may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
CAUTION when the ABS operates.
When you need to brake suddenly, The ABS system will not operate when the
continue depressing the brake pedal vehicle speed is below approximately 6
strongly to bring the effect of the mph (10 km/h).
brake assist.
WARNING
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver Always use the utmost care in
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly driving – overconfidence because
and the brake power is insufficient. you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
Brake assist generates the brake power to a serious accident.
according to the speed at which the driver The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
depresses the brake pedal. tors on the disc brakes give a warning
NOTE noise when the brake pads are worn. CAUTION
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
When you depress the brake pedal . The ABS system does not always
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
strongly or suddenly, the following decrease stopping distance. You
mediately have your vehicle checked by
phenomena occur. However, even should always maintain a safe
your SUBARU dealer.
though these occur, they do not indi- following distance from other
Starting and operating 7-33
vehicles. Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
. When driving on badly surfaced tribution (EBD) system malfunctions
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow, The EBD system maximizes the effective-
stopping distances may be long- ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
er for a vehicle with the ABS brakes to supply a greater proportion of
system than one without. When the braking force. It functions by adjusting
driving under these conditions, the distribution of braking force to the rear
therefore, reduce your speed and wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
leave ample distance from other loading condition and speed.
vehicles. The EBD system is an integral part of the
. When you feel the ABS system ABS system and uses some of the ABS
operating, you should maintain system’s components to perform its func-
constant brake pedal pressure. tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
Do not pump the brake pedal ing force. If any of the ABS components
since doing so may defeat the used by the EBD system malfunction, the Turbo models
operation of the ABS system. EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
& ABS system self-check vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
Just after the vehicle is started, you may and does not indicate a malfunction.
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS system being carried out and
does not indicate any abnormal condition.
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-21. If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
– CONTINUED –
7-34 Starting and operating
system warning light and ABS warning 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the Vehicle Dynamics Control
light illuminate simultaneously. “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
system
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the brake system warning light and ABS system inspected.
warning light illuminate simultaneously WARNING
during driving. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Always use the utmost care in
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the Instead, have the vehicle towed to the driving – overconfidence because
conventional braking system will still func- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be namics Control system equipped
more prone to locking when the brakes vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
are applied harder than usual and the WARNING ious accident.
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control. . Driving with the brake system
If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
CAUTION
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps. system may not be working . Even if your vehicle is equipped
properly. If the light remains with Vehicle Dynamics Control
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, illuminated, have the brakes in-
flat location. system, winter tires should be
spected by a SUBARU dealer used when driving on snow-cov-
2. Shut down the engine, apply the immediately.
parking brake, and then restart it. ered or icy roads; in addition,
. If at all in doubt about whether vehicle speed should be reduced
3. Release the parking brake. If both the brakes are operating prop- considerably. Simply having a
warning lights turn off, the EBD system erly, do not drive the vehicle. Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to Have your vehicle towed to the tem does not guarantee that the
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- vehicle will be able to avoid
system inspected. pair. accidents in any situation.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine . Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
has been restarted, shut down the engine namics Control system is an
again, apply the parking brake, and check indication that the road being
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” travelled on has a slippery sur-
F11-25. face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
Starting and operating 7-35
that full vehicle control will be trol system is reduced and Activation of this function is indicated by
maintained at all times and under this should be taken into ac- steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-
all conditions, its activation count when driving the vehi- namics Control operation indicator light.
should be seen as a sign that cle in such a condition.
the speed of the vehicle should . Skid Suppression Function
. If non-matching tires are used,
be reduced considerably. The skid suppression function is designed
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
to help maintain directional stability by
. Whenever suspension compo- system may not operate cor-
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
nents, steering components, or rectly.
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
an axle are removed from a . The Vehicle Dynamics Control vation of this function is indicated by
vehicle, have an inspection of system helps prevent unstable flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
that system performed by an vehicle motion such as skidding operation indicator light.
authorized SUBARU dealer. using control of the brakes and
. The following precautions should engine power. Do not turn off the NOTE
be observed in order to ensure Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- tem unless it is absolutely ne- tem may be considered normal when
trol system is operating properly: cessary. If you must turn off the the following conditions occur.
– All four wheels should be Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- – Slight twitching of the brake
fitted with tires of the same tem, drive very carefully based pedal is felt.
size, type, and brand. Further- on the road surface condition. – The vehicle or steering wheel
more, the amount of wear shakes to a small degree.
should be the same for all In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding – An operating sound from the
four tires. on a slippery road surface and/or during engine compartment is heard
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, briefly when starting the engine
– Keep the tire pressure at the the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
proper level as shown on the and when driving off after starting
adjusts the engine’s output and the the engine.
vehicle placard attached to wheels’ respective braking forces to help
the driver’s side door pillar. – The brake pedal seems to jolt
maintain traction and directional control.
– Use only the specified tem- when driving off after starting the
. Traction Control Function engine.
porary spare tire to replace a The traction control function is designed to
flat tire. With a temporary . In the circumstances listed in the
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on following, the vehicle may be more
spare tire, the effectiveness slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- unstable than it feels to the driver.
maintain traction and directional control.
– CONTINUED –
7-36 Starting and operating
The Vehicle Dynamics Control System & Vehicle Dynamics Control ing engine operation, the mode of the
may therefore operate. Such operation mode switch (STI) Vehicle Dynamics Control System will be
does not indicate a system malfunc- changed.
tion.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control mode
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads When the ignition switch is on, this mode
– on unfinished roads is selected.
– when the vehicle is fitted with This mode enables all controls for ABS,
snow tires or winter tires the Traction Control System, and the
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Select
Control system will cause operation of this mode for most driving situations.
the steering wheel to feel slightly When this mode is selected, the indicator
different compared to that for normal light on the combination meter turns off.
conditions. ! Traction mode
. It is always important to reduce This mode restricts the functions of the
speed when approaching a corner, Indicator light Traction Control System and Vehicle
even if the vehicle is equipped with Dynamics Control system and thus delays
Vehicle Dynamics Control. utilizing their functions as a reaction to
. Always turn off the engine before vehicle behavior in comparison with the
replacing a tire as failure to do so may Vehicle Dynamics Control mode. This
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control mode should be used in driving situations
system unable to operate correctly. where the vehicle dynamic performance
will improve without decreasing engine
& Vehicle Dynamics Control torque control.
system monitor When the switch is pressed briefly during
engine operation, the indicator light on the
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- combination meter illuminates in green.
tion indicator light” F3-23 and “Vehicle When the switch is pressed again to
Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch system, the indicator light turns off.
Traction Control OFF indicator light (STI)”
F3-23. When the switch is pressed briefly or for
more than approximately 3 seconds dur-
Starting and operating 7-37
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or switch. To make the switch usable Tire pressure monitoring
otherwise slippery surface again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and restart the en-
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow gine. models)
. When the switch is pressed to
When the switch is pressed during engine deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
OFF indicator light on the combination formance is comparable with that of a
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Control system will be deactivated and the Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
vehicle will behave like a model not activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- system except when absolutely neces-
trol system. When the switch is pressed sary.
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, compo-
Control OFF indicator light turns off. nents of the brake control system may
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system still activate. When the brake control
deactivated, traction and stability en- system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
Turbo models
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics namics Control operation indicator
Control system is unavailable. Therefore light illuminates.
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will be activated automatically
when the engine is started.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the Non-turbo models
Starting and operating 7-39
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting for tire and sensor replacement and/
by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard or system resetting.
installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or
is severely low. Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-31. aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
The tire pressure monitoring system will The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of
activate only when the vehicle is driven at does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for
this system may not react immediately to a pressures, increase the vehicle approximately one minute, promptly
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have
a blow-out caused by running over a to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected.
sharp object). tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION
pressure warning light should turn
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later. . Do not place metal film or any
illuminates while driving, never metal parts in the cargo area/
brake suddenly and keep driving If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres- trunk. This may cause poor re-
straight ahead while gradually redu- ception of the signals from the
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes tire pressure sensors, and the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an tire pressure monitoring system
accident involving serious vehicle the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire will not function properly.
damage and serious personal injury
as soon as possible. . FCC WARNING
could occur.
When a spare tire is mounted or a Changes or modifications not
Check the pressure for all four tires
wheel rim is replaced without the expressly approved by the party
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
original pressure sensor/transmitter responsible for compliance
tire pressure shown on the tire
being transferred, the low tire pres- could void the user’s authority
placard on the door pillar on the
sure warning light will illuminate to operate the equipment.
driver’s side.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately one minute. This indicates
very short distance, the tires get the TPMS is unable to monitor all
warm and their pressures increase four road wheels. Contact your
– CONTINUED –
7-40 Starting and operating
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
When facing downhill, the front wheels spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
should be turned into the curb. optional), pay attention to blocks
7-42 Starting and operating
Hill start assist system (MT On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle
is depressed while the brake pedal is also begins to move forward after being re-
models – if equipped) depressed, braking power is maintained versed.
temporarily by the Hill start assist system
when the brake pedal is released. The If the braking power of the Hill start assist
CAUTION system is insufficient after the brake pedal
driver is therefore able to start the vehicle
the same way as on a level grade, just is released, apply more braking power by
The Hill start assist system is a
using the clutch and accelerator pedal. depressing the brake pedal again.
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when & To activate/deactivate the Hill
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be start assist system (STI)
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake, CAUTION
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the clutch pedal is While the Hill start assist system is
released. deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
The Hill start assist system is a device to maintained if the brake pedal is
make starting on an uphill grade easier. released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
4. Confirm the following items. 5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
. The ABS warning light turns off. mode switch and hold it until the Vehicle Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch,
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Dynamics Control OFF indicator light press the Vehicle Dynamics Control mode
indicator light turns off. turns off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control switch once again. Then the Hill start
. The Brake system warning light OFF indicator light will illuminate in green, assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
illuminates. change to yellow, remain illuminated in 8. Turn off the engine.
yellow for several seconds and then turn 9. Restart the engine.
off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle While the Hill start assist system is
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics indicator light illuminates continuously.
Control mode switch. ! To activate
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the
system is activated. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off.
– CONTINUED –
7-44 Starting and operating
& Hill start assist warning light/ Cruise control control is not in use to avoid uninten-
Hill start assist OFF indicator tionally setting of the cruise control.
light Cruise control enables you to maintain a
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light (MT
constant vehicle speed without holding & To set cruise control
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
models – if equipped)/Hill start assist OFF
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
indicator light (STI)” F3-22.
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic 1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but-
ton.
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. Make sure the “CRUISE” main
switch is turned off when the cruise
Starting and operating 7-45
! To increase the speed (by accel- ! To decrease the speed (by button) button once. Now the desired speed is set
erator pedal) and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to pedal.
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.
& Cruise control indicator light
Now the desired speed is set and the Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
vehicle will keep running at that speed F3-26.
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control set indicator
NOTE light
If the difference between the actual Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
vehicle speed when the button is F3-27.
pushed and the speed last time you Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the until the vehicle reaches the desired
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph speed. Then, release the button. The
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the vehicle speed at that moment will be
cruise control system unit regards this memorized and treated as the new set
operation as that intended to decrease speed.
the vehicle speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “SET/COAST”
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Operation during cold weather ............................. 8-8
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-9
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 Corrosion protection.......................................... 8-10
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 Tire chains ........................................................ 8-11
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
All AWD models except OUTBACK ...................... 8-6 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
OUTBACK........................................................... 8-6 Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) ............ 8-14
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-15
8
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
is located under the door latch on the for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Driving tips 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have t he probl em gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or rear catalytic converter.
gate (5-door) closed while driving
. Never start the engine by pushing or
to prevent exhaust gas from
pulling the vehicle.
entering the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
NOTE the vehicle is moving.
Due to the expansion and contraction . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the metals used in the manufacture the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
of the exhaust system, you may hear a Turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
crackling sound coming from the ex- your vehicle checked and repaired by an
haust system for a short time after the authorized SUBARU dealer.
engine has been shut off. This sound is . Do not apply undercoating or rust
normal. prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
Non-turbo models near flammable materials (e.g.,
The catalytic converter is installed in the grass, paper, rags or leaves),
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to because the catalytic converter
– CONTINUED –
8-4 Driving tips
Driving tips for AWD models . An AWD model is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
There is little difference in handling, F9-14.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an . Always maintain a safe driving
ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
avoid having an accident on a
use only the same size, construction,
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
brand, and load range as the original tires
ing or under other similar condi-
listed on the tire placard. Using other
tions.
sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the . Always use the utmost care in
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine drive train of your vehicle and may affect driving – overconfidence be-
power to all four wheels. AWD models ride, handling, braking, speedometer/od- cause you are driving an All-
provide better traction when driving on ometer calibration, and clearance be- Wheel Drive model could easily
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tween the body and tires. It also may be lead to a serious accident.
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
By shifting power between the front and control.
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
provide added traction during acceleration replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
and added engine braking force during original temporary spare tire stored in the
deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle train of your vehicle.
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located under the
following tips in mind. door latch on the driver’s side.
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving & All AWD models except & OUTBACK
OUTBACK Your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary
Your AWD model is neither a conventional roads or off-road. But please keep in mind
WARNING off-road vehicle nor an all terrain vehicle. It that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger
. Always maintain a safe driving is a passenger vehicle designed primarily vehicle and is neither a conventional off-
speed according to the road and for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If
weather conditions in order to some limited off-road capabilities in situa- you do take your SUBARU off-road,
avoid having an accident on a tions in which driving surfaces are rela- certain common sense precautions such
sharp turn, during sudden brak- tively level, obstruction-free and otherwise as those in the following list should be
ing or under other similar condi- similar to on-road driving conditions. Op- taken.
tions. erating it under other than those condi- . Make certain that you and all of your
tions could subject the vehicle to exces- passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Always use the utmost care in sive stress which might result in damage
driving – overconfidence be- . Carry some emergency equipment,
not eligible for repair under warranty. If you such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
cause you are driving an All- do take your SUBARU off-road, you
Wheel Drive model could easily wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
should review the common sense precau- citizens band radio.
lead to a serious accident. tions in the next section (applicable to the . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
OUTBACK) for general guidance. But sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
please keep in mind that your vehicle’s over rough terrain.
CAUTION
off-road capabilities are more limited than
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
Do not drive on rough roads or over those of the OUTBACK.
all times. When driving off-road, you will
curbs in a vehicle that has 17-inch Never attempt to drive through pools and not have the benefit of marked traffic
or other ultra-low-profile tires. The puddles, or roads flooded with water. lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
wheels and tires could be damaged Water entering the engine air intake or the like.
by shock forces, leading to abnor- the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
mal vibration or poor straight-line electrical parts may damage your vehicle
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
tracking. Driving would then be and may cause it to stall.
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more difficult. more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
Driving tips 8-7
cially at higher speeds. exhaust system is very hot while the in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the engine is running and right after the . Never equip your vehicle with tires
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the engine stops. This could create a fire larger than those specified in this manual.
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive hazard. . Frequent driving of an AWD model
with your fingers and thumbs on the . After driving through tall grass, mud, under hard-driving conditions such as
outside of the rim. rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there rough roads or off roads will necessitate
. If driving through water, such as when is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, more frequent replacement of engine oil,
crossing shallow streams, first check the sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the brake fluid and transmission oil than that
depth of the water and the bottom of the underbody. Clear off any such matter from specified in the maintenance schedule
stream bed for firmness and ensure that the underbody. If the vehicle is used with described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly these materials trapped or adhering to the nance Booklet”.
and completely through the stream. The underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
water should be shallow enough that it fire could occur. Remember that damage done to your
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- . Secure all cargo carried inside the SUBARU while operating it off-road and
riage. Water entering the engine air intake vehicle and make certain that it is not not using common sense precautions
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing piled higher than the seatbacks. During such as those listed above is not eligible
onto electrical parts may damage your sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo for warranty coverage.
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never could be thrown around in the vehicle and . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
attempt to drive through rushing water; cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on road driving. Suspension components are
regardless of its depth, it can wash away the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
the ground from under your tires, resulting center of gravity and make it more prone need to be washed thoroughly.
in possible loss of traction and even to tip over.
vehicle rollover. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
. Always check your brakes for effec- from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, pedal slightly and move the select lever
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly back and forth between “D” and “R”
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
that process several times to dry out the the best possible traction, avoid spinning
brake discs and brake pads. the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. Do not drive or park over or near When the road surface is extremely
flammable materials such as dry grass or slippery, you can obtain better traction by
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The starting the vehicle with the transmission
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
Use a windshield washer fluid that con- nozzles.
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes CAUTION
because they may damage the paint of
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
the vehicle.
tration appropriately for the out-
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- side temperature. If the concen-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% tration is inappropriate, sprayed
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- washer fluid may freeze on the
& Operation during cold perature varies according to how much it windshield and obstruct your
weather is diluted, as indicated in the following view, and the fluid may freeze in
Carry some emergency equipment, such table. the reservoir tank.
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, Washer Fluid Con- . State or local regulations on
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. centration Freezing Temperature
volatile organic compounds may
Check the battery and cables. Cold 30% 10.48F (−128C) restrict the use of methanol, a
temperatures reduce battery capacity. common windshield washer anti-
50% −48F (−208C) freeze additive. Washer fluids
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter 100% −498F (−458C) containing non-methanol anti-
starts. freeze agents should be used
In order to prevent freezing of washer only if they provide cold weather
It normally takes longer to start the engine fluid, check the freezing temperatures in protection without damaging
in very cold weather conditions. Use an the table above when adjusting the fluid your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity concentration to the outside temperature. or washer system.
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
will make it harder to start the engine. a different concentration from the one
Keep the door locks from freezing by
Driving tips 8-9
! Before driving your vehicle When the vehicle has been left parked If your SUBARU is not going to be used
Before entering the vehicle, remove any after use on roads heavily covered with for an extended period, it is best to have
snow or ice from your shoes because that snow, or has been left parked during a the fuel tank filled to capacity.
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
could make the pedals slippery and
brake system, which could cause poor
& Driving on snowy and icy
driving dangerous. roads
braking action. Check for snow or ice
While warming up the vehicle before buildup on the suspension, disc brakes To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
brake pedal, and all other controls operate If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, speed driving, and sharp turning when
smoothly. being careful not to damage the disc driving on snowy or icy roads.
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- Always maintain ample distance between
Clear away ice and snow that has
ness. your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
WARNING To supplement the foot brake, use the
safe to do so and check under the fenders engine brake effectively to control the
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
periodically. gases under your vehicle. Keep when necessary.)
! Parking in cold weather snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
Do not use the parking brake when vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
parking for long periods in cold weather the vehicle in snow with the engine
running. leading to loss of vehicle control.
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, you should observe the following An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
tips. ! Refueling in cold weather hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT mance on snowy and icy roads. For
To help prevent moisture from forming in
models, or the select lever in “P” for AT information on braking on slippery sur-
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
models. faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
System)” F7-32 and “Vehicle Dynamics
2. Use tire stops under the tires to tank is recommended during cold weather.
Control system” F7-34.
prevent the vehicle from moving. Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an WARNING
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the Do not use the cruise control on
the glass to prevent damage to them.
fuel level reaches half empty. slippery roads such as snowy or icy
– CONTINUED –
8-10 Driving tips
roads. This may cause loss of windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- freezing type wiper blades may not
vehicle control. ger and deicer” F3-48. perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
If the rear wiper blade is frozen to the rear
vehicle speed.
CAUTION window, use the rear window defogger.
Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-48.
Avoid prolonged continuous driving When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts NOTE
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the to stick on the surface of the windshield When the season requiring non-freez-
engine’s intake system and may despite wiper operation, use the defroster ing type wiper blades is over, replace
hinder the airflow, which could re- with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the them with standard wiper blades.
sult in engine shutdown or even temperature control dial set for maximum
breakdown. warmth. After the windshield gets warmed & Corrosion protection
enough to melt the frozen snow on it,
! Wiper operation when snowing wash it away using the windshield washer. Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
Before driving in cold weather, make sure Refer to “Washer” F3-39.
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
& Snow tires
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
windshield or rear window. wiper from working effectively. If snow is WARNING
If the front wiper blades are frozen to the stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
windshield, use the defroster with the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop . When replacing original tires with
airflow control dial in the “ ” position the vehicle at road side, use the hazard winter (snow) tires, make sure
and the temperature control dial set for warning flasher to alert other drivers. you use only the same size,
maximum warmth until the wiper blades construction and load range as
We recommend use of non-freezing type
are completely thawed out. For details, the original tires listed on the tire
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
refer to the following section. placard. Using other sizes and
seasons you could have snow and freez-
. For the manual climate control system, construction may affect speed-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
refer to “Defrosting or defogging the ometer/odometer calibration and
superior wiping performance in snowy
windshield” F4-5. clearance between the body and
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
. For the automatic climate control sys- tires. It also may be dangerous
are suitable for your vehicle.
tem, refer to “Control panel” F4-8. and lead to loss of vehicle con-
CAUTION trol.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wind- . You must install four winter tires
shield wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the During high-speed driving, non-
Driving tips 8-11
that are of the same size, con- tires that are of the same size, construc- Remember to drive with care at all times
struction, brand, and load range. tion, brand and load range and you should regardless of the type of tires on your
Mixing other sizes or construc- never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires vehicle.
tions may result in severe me- since this may result in dangerous hand-
chanical damage to the drive ling characteristics. When you choose a & Tire chains
train of your vehicle and may tire, make sure that there is enough
affect ride, handling, braking and clearance between the tire and vehicle CAUTION
speedometer/odometer calibra- body.
tion. It also may be dangerous Tire chains cannot be used on your
Remember to drive with care at all times Impreza, WRX and STI because of
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
regardless of the type of tires on your the lack of clearance between the
trol.
vehicle. tires and vehicle body.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires ! Non-turbo models
since it may cause dangerous Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
handling characteristics and lead tires” as original equipment, which are & Rocking the vehicle
to an accident. designed to provide an adequate measure If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
of traction, handling and braking perfor- snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it erator pedal slightly and move the shift
! Turbo models
may be possible to enhance performance lever/select lever back and forth between
Your vehicle is equipped with “summer through use of tires designed specifically “1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
tires” as original equipment, which are for winter driving conditions. engine. For the best possible traction,
inadequate for driving on slippery roads When you choose to install winter tires on avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
such as on snow-covered or icy roads. your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire free the vehicle.
Compared with winter and all-season size and type. You must install four winter When the road surface is extremely
tires, summer tires give significantly less tires that are of the same size, construc- slippery, you can obtain better traction by
grip on snowy and icy road surfaces. tion, brand and load range and you should starting the vehicle with the transmission
Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
recommended when driving with such since this may result in dangerous hand-
road conditions. ling characteristics. When you choose a If your vehicle is an AT model, for
When you choose to install winter tires on tire, make sure that there is enough information about holding the transmission
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire clearance between the tire and vehicle in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
size and type. You must install four winter body. manual mode” F7-26.
8-12 Driving tips
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross In addition, the total weight applied to
Vehicle Weight Rating and each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
The load capacity of your vehicle is should confirm that GVW and front and
determined by weight, not by available rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
cargo space. The maximum load you can GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle scale, found at a commercial
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s The certification label attached to the
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR weighing station.
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR Do not use replacement tires with a lower
belongings, any optional equipment such (Gross Axle Weight Rating). load range than the originals because they
as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc. The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
combined total of weight of the vehicle, range than the originals do not increase
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation.
The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual
weight of your vehicle – including standard
equipment, fluids, emergency tools and
spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle
capacity weight.
– CONTINUED –
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof molding and crossbar the vehicle and create a safety ! Installing carrying attachments on
(if equipped) hazard. the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
Cargo can be carried after securing the such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
installing the appropriate carrying attach- bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar tions and make sure that the attachment is
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
When you carry cargo on the roof using attachments designed specifically for the
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
attachment, never exceed the maximum designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
load limit as explained below. You should ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
also be careful that your vehicle does not Before operating the vehicle, make sure
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating that the cargo is properly secured on the
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle attachment.
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
CAUTION about loading cargo into or onto your
NOTE
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle” Remember that the vehicle’s center of
. For cargo carrying purposes, the F8-12. The maximum load limit of the gravity is altered with the weight of the
roof molding must be used to- cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment load on the roof, thus affecting the
gether with a roof crossbar kit must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place driving characteristics.
and the appropriate carrying at- the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
the roof or paint or a dangerous Always properly secure all cargo. effects will be increased.
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
Driving tips 8-15
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
In case of emergency
9
9-2 In case of emergency
possible because the spare tire is de- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
signed only for temporary use. position.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
. Do not use two or more temporary 2) Indicator location mark
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire . When the wear indicator appears on 2. Pull any one spare fuse out of the
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance the tread, replace the tire. spare fuse holder in the engine compart-
is reduced. . The temporary spare tire must be used ment. Spare fuses are attached on the
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire back side of the fuse holder cover. You
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a may pick up any one fuse in the spare
rear wheel and install the temporary spare fuse holder.
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
NOTE
After reinstalling the conventional tire,
remove the spare fuse from the FWD
connector in order to reactivate All-
Wheel Drive. Make sure to restore the
removed spare fuse in the spare fuse
holder located in the engine compart-
ment.
In case of emergency 9-5
– CONTINUED –
9-6 In case of emergency
Others 1) Notch
2) Valve hole
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take 7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
the spare tire out. a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
NOTE the wheel cover to remove it.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
4-door models with standard spare tire
– CONTINUED –
9-8 In case of emergency
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel 10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
– CONTINUED –
9-10 In case of emergency
& Tire pressure monitoring vides the driver with the warning message it with a spare tire as soon as
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. indicated by sending a signal from a possible.
models) sensor that is installed in each wheel When a spare tire is mounted or a
when tire pressure is severely low. wheel rim is replaced without the
The tire pressure monitoring system will original pressure sensor/transmitter
activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
If the low tire pressure warning light for tire and sensor replacement and/
illuminates while driving, never or system resetting.
brake suddenly and keep driving Do not inject any tire liquid or
straight ahead while gradually redu- aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
Turbo models cing speed. Then slowly pull off the as this may cause a malfunction of
road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire pressure sensors.
accident involving serious vehicle If the light illuminates steadily after
damage and serious personal injury blinking for approximately one min-
could occur. ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
Check the pressure for all four tires dealer to have the system inspected.
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
Non-turbo models rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
In case of emergency 9-11
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
– CONTINUED –
9-12 In case of emergency
Engine overheating 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood” radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
F11-5. radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
WARNING Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If clockwise slowly without pressing down
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off until it stops. Release the pressure from
Never attempt to remove the radia- the engine and contact your authorized the radiator. After the pressure has been
tor cap until the engine has been dealer for repair. fully released, remove the cap by pressing
shut off and has fully cooled down. 3. After the engine coolant temperature down and turning it.
When the engine is hot, the coolant has dropped, turn off the engine.
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot If any of the following conditions occur,
could release a spray of boiling hot turn off the engine.
coolant, which could burn you very . The temperature gauge stays in the
seriously. overheated zone (turbo models). Refer
to “Temperature gauge (turbo models)”
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the F3-11.
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. . The coolant temperature high warn-
ing light remains illuminated (non-
& If steam is coming from the turbo models). Refer to “Coolant tem-
engine compartment perature low indicator light (non-turbo
models)/Coolant temperature high
Turn off the engine and get everyone warning light (non-turbo models)” F3-
away from the vehicle until it cools down. 17.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
& If no steam is coming from check the coolant level in the reserve
the engine compartment tank.
NOTE If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
For details about how to check the mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
coolant level or how to add coolant, 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-14. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
1. Keep the engine running at idling radiator with coolant.
speed.
9-14 In case of emergency
4. Tighten the towing hook securely 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
using the jack handle. with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
Front towing hook (turbo models): screwdriver into the cutout of the cover using the jack handle.
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool and pry open the cover.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
cargo area.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
– CONTINUED –
9-16 In case of emergency
Rear towing hook: the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the WARNING
trunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door). Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
The rear tie-down hooks are located near This is the best way to transport your
each of the jack-up reinforcements. vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
WARNING
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for position for AT models. Shift the shift lever
downward anchoring. If they are into the “1st” position for MT models.
used to anchor the vehicle in any 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
other direction, cables may slip off 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
the hooks, possibly causing a dan- properly with safety chains. Each safety
gerous situation. chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains 1. Release the parking brake and put the
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. transmission in the “N”/neutral position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency
WARNING distances, transport your vehicle Rear gate – if the rear gate
on a flat-bed truck. cannot be unlocked
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the In the event that you cannot unlock the
vehicle is being towed because rear gate by operating the power door
the steering wheel and the direc- locking switches or the remote keyless
tion of the wheels will be locked. entry system, you can unlock it from inside
. Remember that the brake booster the cargo area.
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being 1. Remove the access cover at the
towed using this method. Trans- bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
mission damage could result if
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
the vehicle is towed with the
behind the rear gate trim panel.
engine running.
. For models with automatic trans- CAUTION
mission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 20 Never operate the rear gate lock
mph (30 km/h) and the traveling release lever with fingers because
distance to less than 31 miles (50 doing so may cause an injury. Al-
km). For greater speeds and ways use a flat-head screwdriver or
In case of emergency 9-19
clockwise.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Appearance care
10
10-2 Appearance care
CAUTION Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, solvents on the surface of the bulb
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of assembly cover. However, if a polish
. Be careful not to damage brake wax on a painted surface leads to loss of or wax with organic solvents is
hoses, sensor harnesses, and the original luster and also quickens the applied to the cover surface, com-
other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
Never polish just the affected area, but
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
include the surrounding area as well.
or more between the washer nozzle and & Cleaning aluminum wheels
Always polish in only one direction. A
the vehicle.
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
. Do not wash the same area continu- mended. Never use a coarse-grained
ously. clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
compound. Coarse-grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
resin parts such as moldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device.
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.
10-4 Appearance care
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. NOTE
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry or gasoline must never be used on
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If leather or synthetic interior materials.
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended & Climate control panel, audio
that the seats and head restraints be panel, instrument panel,
If the stain does not come out, try a covered, or the windows shaded, to
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use console panel, and switches
prevent fading or shrinkage.
the cleaner on a hidden place and make Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather
ment panel, center console, combination
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
meter panel, and switches.
leather seat section will develop soft folds
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. Do not use organic solvents such as
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
materials. cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.
– CONTINUED –
10-6 Appearance care
– CONTINUED –
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When checking or servicing
in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment in the engine compartment
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water. WARNING
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always stop the engine and set
belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake firmly to pre-
tempt to take its connectors vent the vehicle from moving.
apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down.
system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot
erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and
tester for this wiring. remain hot for some time after
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt the engine is stopped.
pretensioner needs service, con- . Do not spill engine oil, engine
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- coolant, brake fluid or any other
er. fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire. CAUTION
. Always remove the key from the Do not contact the belt cover while
ignition switch. When the ignition checking the components in the
switch is in the “ON” position, engine compartment. Doing so may
the cooling fan may operate cause your hand to slip off the belt
suddenly even when the engine cover and result in an unexpected
is stopped. injury.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option) temporarily place
that system in the service mode
to prevent it from unexpectedly
starting the engine.
Maintenance and service 11-5
– CONTINUED –
11-6 Maintenance and service
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Maintenance and service 11-7
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine compartment overview (page 11-24)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
& Non-turbo models (page 11-21) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(AT) (page 11-22)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)
6) Fuse box (page 11-45)
7) Battery (page 11-44)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-10)
13) Air cleaner case (page 11-17)
– CONTINUED –
11-8 Maintenance and service
– CONTINUED –
11-12 Maintenance and service
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of The oil quantity indicated above is only
the bottom of engine and install the oil guideline.
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to The necessary quantity of oil depends on
twist or damage the seal. the quantity of oil that has been drained.
10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
indicated in the following table after the depending on the temperature of the oil
seal makes contact with the bottom of and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
engine. refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the level gauge to confirm that
Oil filter color Part number Amount of the level is correct.
rotation
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
7/8 seal and drain plug.
Turbo models Blue 15208AA12A rotation 14. Run the engine until it reaches the
normal operating temperature. Then stop
CAUTION the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
. Never over tighten the oil filter again and if necessary, add more engine
because that can result in an oil oil.
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine CAUTION
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. Be careful not to spill engine oil
If spilled oil is not promptly when adding it. If oil touches the
wiped up, the oil could cause a exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
fire. smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
Non-turbo models
11. Reinstall under cover.
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench. 12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a “Engine oil” F12-5.
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
Maintenance and service 11-13
& Recommended grade and engine oil for optimum engine perfor- Cooling system
viscosity mance. Conventional oil may be used if
synthetic oil is unavailable.
CAUTION WARNING
Use only engine oil with the recom- Never attempt to remove the radia-
mended grade and viscosity. tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-5. completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
NOTE serious burns from a spray of boil-
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects ing hot coolant when the cap is
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity removed.
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en- CAUTION
gine. . Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
& Synthetic oil does not require the first change
You should use synthetic engine oil that for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
meets the same requirements given for years/220,000 km). This coolant
conventional engine oil. When using should not be mixed with any
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same other brand or type of coolant
classification, viscosity and grade shown during this period. Mixing with a
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine different coolant will reduce the
oil” F12-5. Also, you must follow the oil life of the coolant. Should it be
and filter changing intervals shown in the necessary to top up the coolant
Warranty and Maintenance booklet. for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
NOTE If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity diluted with another brand or
noted in chapter 12 is the required type, the maintenance interval is
– CONTINUED –
11-14 Maintenance and service
shortened to that of the mixing If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
coolant. system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not splash the engine coolant If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
over painted parts. The alcohol sary, there may be a leak in the engine
contained in the engine coolant cooling system. It is recommended that
may damage the paint surface. the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Cooling fan, hose and con- & Engine coolant
nections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling ! Checking the coolant level
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches WARNING
1) “FULL” level mark
a specific temperature. 2) “LOW” level mark
Never attempt to remove the radia-
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate tor cap until the engine has been
even when the following conditions occur, Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
shut off and has cooled down 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. completely. Since the coolant is
. For turbo models, the engine coolant of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
under pressure, you may suffer
temperature gauge exceeds the normal 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
serious burns from a spray of boil-
operating range. Refer to “Temperature “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
ing hot coolant when the cap is
gauge (turbo models)” F3-11. “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
removed.
. For non-turbo models, the coolant empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
temperature high warning light blinks or as required.
illuminates in RED. Refer to “Coolant
temperature low indicator light (non-turbo
models)/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light (non-turbo models)” F3-17.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-45 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
14.
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
11-16 Maintenance and service
4. Install the under cover. just below the filler neck, allowing enough CAUTION
room to add genuine SUBARU cooling
system conditioner in the radiator. Add . Be careful not to spill engine
genuine SUBARU cooling system condi- coolant when adding it. If coolant
tioner until the coolant level reaches the touches the exhaust pipe, it may
filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air a fire. If engine coolant gets on
bleeding and trapped air in the system. the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
NOTE
. Do not splash the engine coolant
For the guidelines of coolant quantity
over painted parts. The alcohol
(including coolant in the reservoir
contained in the engine coolant
tank), refer to “Engine coolant” F12-
may damage the paint surface.
10.
Non-turbo models
1) Fill up to this level
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-
voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.
correctly in place. Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner
8. Start and race the engine at 2,000 to element
3,000 rpm for 5 to 6 times within 40 Replace the air cleaner element according
seconds. WARNING to the maintenance schedule in the
9. Stop the engine and wait until the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add more frequently. It is recommended that
coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
the engine backfires. If the air ! Non-turbo models
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap cleaner element is not installed
back on and tighten firmly. when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
1) Connector
2) Clip
Maintenance and service 11-19
CAUTION
. When disconnecting the spark
plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
. Make sure the cables are re-
placed in the correct order.
– CONTINUED –
11-20 Maintenance and service
& Recommended spark plugs Drive belts Check the deflection of the front
For the recommended spark plugs, refer side belt and if there is any loosen-
to “Electrical system” F12-3. ess, cracks, wear or unusual noise
on the front side belt, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Continuing to use the vehicle with
the belt outside of the specification
may cause the engine to malfunc-
tion and the above components to
malfunction.
NOTE
There is no transmission oil level
gauge for STI. Consult your SUBARU
dealer to check the oil level.
– CONTINUED –
11-24 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and Rear differential gear oil Power steering fluid
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base There is no rear differential gear oil level & Checking the fluid level
oils and additives. Never use different gauge. To check the rear differential gear
brands together. For details, refer to oil level, we recommend that you consult
“Manual transmission, front differential your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
and rear differential gear oil” F12-8.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-8.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir . Be careful not to spill power
tank. steering fluid when adding it. If
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has power steering fluid touches the
been run: Check that the oil level is exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad 1) “MAX” level mark
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If 2) “MIN” level mark
the surface of the reservoir tank. power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it Check the fluid level monthly.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
off. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
run: Check that the oil level is between
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
surface of the reservoir tank. & Recommended fluid
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
3. If the fluid level is lower than the Refer to “Fluids” F12-9. container.
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
mended fluid as necessary to bring the WARNING
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
. Never let brake fluid contact your
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
eyes because brake fluid can be
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
harmful to your eyes. If brake
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
– CONTINUED –
11-26 Maintenance and service
clean water. For safety, when & Recommended brake fluid Clutch fluid (MT models)
performing this work, wearing Refer to “Fluids” F12-9.
eye protection is advisable. & Checking the fluid level
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture CAUTION
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss Never use different brands of brake
of braking performance. fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
. If the vehicle requires frequent they are the same brand.
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care- Check the fluid level on the outside of the
ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
reservoir. mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
. Never splash the brake fluid over to “MAX” level mark.
painted surfaces or rubber parts. Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
Alcohol contained in the brake container.
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid WARNING
when adding it. If brake fluid
Never let clutch fluid contact your
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
eyes because clutch fluid can be
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
them thoroughly with clean water.
off.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Maintenance and service 11-27
– CONTINUED –
11-28 Maintenance and service
Clutch pedal (MT models) & Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system (MT
free play models – if equipped)
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- Ensure that the Hill start assist system
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and operates properly under the following
Maintenance Booklet”. circumstances:
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
& Checking the clutch function depressing the brake pedal and clutch
Check the clutch engagement and disen- pedal, with the engine running.
gagement. 2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
1. With the engine idling, check that there move backward even after the brake
are no abnormal noises when the clutch pedal is released.
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
1st or reverse feels smooth. climbing the grade by following the normal
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal starting procedures.
slowly to check that the engine and 1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
transmission smoothly couple without If the Hill start assist system does not
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with operate as described above, contact with
any sign of slippage. your finger until you feel resistance, and your SUBARU dealer.
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
11-30 Maintenance and service
Replacement of brake pad result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
and lining
Parking brake stroke:
& Breaking-in of new brake
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be WARNING
broken in as follows. A safe location and situation should
! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving.
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake CAUTION
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times. Pulling the parking brake lever too
The right front disc brake and the right rear ! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of certain to pull the lever up slowly
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). and gently.
close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping 2. With the parking brake release button
noise when the brake pedal is applied. pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
If you hear this scraping noise each time force of approximately 33 lbf [147 N, 15
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake kgf]).
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as 3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
soon as possible. 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
CAUTION brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
If you continue to drive despite the dure.
scraping noise from the audible 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
brake pad wear indicator, it will parking brake stroke is out of the specified
Maintenance and service 11-31
temperature outside. By way of example, the tire pressure monitoring system may one minute.
the following table shows the required tire not be functioning normally. In this event,
pressures that correspond to various out- go to a SUBARU dealer to have the When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
side temperatures when the temperature system inspected as soon as possible. necessary to ensure continued normal
in the garage is 608F (15.68C). operation of the tire pressure monitoring
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there-
Example: tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed
Ti r e s i z e : P 2 0 5 / 5 5 R 1 6 8 9 V a n d the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer.
P205/50R17 88V the low tire pressure warning light, any
Standard tire pressures: increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) an increase in the outside air temperature
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) ignition switch is turned ON or the
warning light to turn off.
Outside Adjusted pressure
light illuminates steadily after blink-
temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] System resetting is necessary when the ing for approximately one minute,
wheels are changed (for example, a you should have your Tire Pressure
Front Rear switch to snow tires) and new TPMS Monitoring System checked at a
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) valves are installed on the newly fitted SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
38 37 wheels. Have this work performed by a ble.
108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- If this light illuminates while driving,
−108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7) ment. never brake suddenly and keep
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu-
If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place.
cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur.
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS If this light still illuminates while
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS driving after adjusting the tire pres-
see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light sure, a tire may have significant
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire on the combination meter will illuminate damage and a fast leak that causes
pressure warning light does not turn off, steadily after blinking for approximately the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
Maintenance and service 11-33
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire rough surface, they can suffer damage
as soon as possible. that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
When a spare tire is mounted or a This type of damage does not become
wheel rim is replaced without the evident until time has passed. Try not
original pressure sensor/transmitter to drive over curbs, potholes or on
being transferred, the low tire pres- other rough surfaces. If doing so is
sure warning light will illuminate unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
steadily after blinking for approxi- down to a walking pace or less, and
mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as
the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are
four road wheels. Contact your not pressed against the curb when you
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible park the vehicle.
for tire and sensor replacement and/ . If you feel unusual vibration while
or system resetting. If the light driving or find it difficult to steer the Check the tire pressures when the tires
illuminates steadily after blinking vehicle in a straight line, one of the are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
for approximately one minute, tires and/or wheels may be damaged. the tire pressures to the values shown on
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer Drive slowly to the nearest authorized the tire placard. The tire placard is located
to have the system inspected. SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
inspected.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
& Tire inspection & Tire pressures and wear Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
Check on a daily basis that the tires are Maintaining the correct tire pressures outside temperature. It is best to check tire
free from serious damage, nails, and helps to maximize the tires’ service lives pressure outdoors before driving the
stones. At the same time, check the tires and is essential for good running perfor- vehicle.
for abnormal wear. mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- it expands, causing the tire pressure to
ately if you find any problem. spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
NOTE journey. release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
– CONTINUED –
11-34 Maintenance and service
NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
. The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders)
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher.
cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.
Maintenance and service 11-35
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread the tires. The resulting loss of & Wear indicators
worn in center) vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
level gauge or the “FULL” mark on the a different concentration from the one Replacement of wiper blades
tank. used previously, purge the old fluid from
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield the piping between the reservoir tank and Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
washer fluid is unavailable use clean washer nozzles by operating the washer the windshield or the wiper blade results in
water. for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
In areas where water freezes in winter, the concentration of the fluid remaining in glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer the piping is too low for the outside after operating the windshield washer or if
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid temperature, it may freeze and block the the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% nozzles. outer surface of the windshield (or rear
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- window) and the wiper blades using a
perature varies according to how much it CAUTION sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
is diluted, as indicated in the following detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
table. cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
tration appropriately for the out-
blades with clean water. The windshield is
Washer Fluid Freezing
side temperature. If the concen-
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
Concentration Temperature tration is inappropriate, sprayed
the windshield with water.
washer fluid may freeze on the
30% 10.48F (−128C) windshield and obstruct your CAUTION
50% −48F (−208C) view, and the fluid may freeze in
100% −498F (−458C)
the reservoir tank. . Do not clean the wiper blades
. State or local regulations on with gasoline or a solvent, such
volatile organic compounds may as paint thinner or benzine. This
CAUTION restrict the use of methanol, a will cause deterioration of the
common windshield washer anti- wiper blades.
Never use engine coolant as washer freeze additive. Washer fluids . While removing the wiper blades
fluid because it could cause paint containing non-methanol anti- from the wiper arms, do not
damage. freeze agents should be used return the wiper arms to the
only if they provide cold weather original positions. Otherwise,
In order to prevent freezing of washer protection without damaging the windshield surface may be
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades scratched.
the table above when adjusting the fluid or washer system.
concentration to the outside temperature. . When returning the raised wiper
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with arms to the original positions,
– CONTINUED –
11-40 Maintenance and service
carefully return the wiper arms & Windshield wiper blade as- ! Type B
on the windshield by hand. You sembly 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the ! Type A
return spring. Otherwise, the wi- 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
& Windshield wiper blade rub- with the grooves in the rubber and slide
ber (type A and type B) the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks.
NOTE
The following illustrations show the
replacement procedures of the blade
rubber for a type A wiper blade assem-
bly, however the replacement proce-
dures are the same for a type B wiper
blade assembly.
1) Metal spines
& Rear window wiper blade & Rear window wiper blade
assembly rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the plastic support. the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
Left-hand side 3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it 5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the counterclockwise. assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
secured clip of the washer tank. To make 6. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
it easy to access the bulb, move the this time, do not touch the bulb surface.
washer tank to the horizontal direction 7. To install the bulb to the headlight
(left-hand side). assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Install the bulb cover.
10. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
11. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).
Left-hand side
– CONTINUED –
11-50 Maintenance and service
Type A
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise & License plate light and pull out the socket.
and remove it. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the license plate light cover.
– CONTINUED –
11-54 Maintenance and service
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. & High mount stop light (4-
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. door) (except LED [Light
3. Install a new bulb. Emitting Diode] type)
4. Reinstall the lens.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Specifications
12
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
4-door 5-door
Rear 58.9 (1,495)*2 60.6 (1,540) 58.9 (1,495)*2 58.9 (1,495) 60.6 (1,540)
3 3
59.1 (1,500)* 59.1 (1,500)*
1
Ground clearance* 6.1 (155) 5.9 (150) 6.1 (155) 6.3 (160) 6.1 (155) 5.9 (150)
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EJ257
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo, except STI) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo, STI)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 8.2 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications
& Fuel
NOTE
The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline.
*1: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
may be temporarily used. For details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
*2: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be
used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. For details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
Specifications 12-5
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
! Non-turbo models
! Turbo models
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature Applied part and model Oil capacity
5-speed 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Manual transmission
6-speed 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt)
Front differential (AT models) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
API classification GL-5
STI 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Rear differential
Others 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
For the checking procedures or other details, refer to “Manual transmission oil” F11-21, “Front differential gear oil (AT models)” F11-23, “Rear
differential gear oil” F11-24.
Specifications 12-9
& Fluids
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Automatic transmission fluid (AT models) · SUBARU ATF 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
Power steering fluid · SUBARU ATF 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid · Genuine SUBARU brake fluid –
Clutch fluid (MT models) · FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid –
For the checking procedures or other details, refer to “Automatic transmission fluid” F11-22, “Power steering fluid” F11-24, “Brake fluid” F11-25 or
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-26.
– CONTINUED –
12-10 Specifications
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure, or other details, refer to “Cooling system” F11-13.
Specifications 12-11
& Tires
Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V 235/45R17 245/40R18
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ 17 6 8 JJ 18 6 81/2 J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T125/70 D17 T135/70 D17
spare tire 2
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm )
Wheel nut tightening torque 72 lbf·ft (100 N·m, 10 kgf·m)*
*: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the edge of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*: The differential between right-hand camber and left-hand camber should be within 45’ or less.
12-12 Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-14 Specifications
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
18 15A . Headlight (right side)
19 15A . Headlight (left side)
12-16 Specifications
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights from A to D are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Specifications 12-17
– CONTINUED –
12-18 Specifications
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications 12-19
1) Vehicle identification number
Vehicle identification 2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is affixed to the
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” driver’s side B-pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-15.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire infla-
vehicle. Putting a load rated tion pressure
tire on any vehicle does not For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated refer to “Tires” F12-11.
load. The vehicle placard shows original
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
Applicable construction of this tire. maximum loaded vehicle weight,
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL seating capacity and loading infor-
BELTED RADIAL” mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
! Construction of under-inflation
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper in- power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a the rim. . Cracking
short distance warms up the tires . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
and increases the tire pressures. A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
Also, the tire pressures are affected components in the bead. extending to cord material.
by the outside temperature. It is . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
best to check tire pressure out- A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
doors before driving the vehicle. cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
When a tire becomes warm, the air laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
inside it expands, causing the tire less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air
pressure to increase. Be careful not line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
to mistakenly release air from a . Carcass optional engine.
warm tire to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges.
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the
cords. the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound sure due to labeling, decoration, or
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands.
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead.
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com-
provides the traction and contains dard tire. pound from the cord material in
the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim the sidewall.
load. A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim
. Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for
The combined weight of those tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed
installed regular production options . Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire.
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread
excess of those standard items . Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes
which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road.
considered in curb weight or acces-
– CONTINUED –
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
– CONTINUED –
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the method.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening
check the tires for abnormal wear. Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-6.
and replace the tires before their of optional equipment + tongue
tread wear indicators become visi- load of a trailer (if applicable))
& Vehicle load limit – how to
ble. When a tire’s tread wear determine For information about vehicle load-
indicator becomes visible, the tire The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
is worn beyond the acceptable limit determined by weight, not by avail- F8-12.
and must be replaced immediately. able cargo space. The load limit of
With a tire in this condition, driving NOTE
your vehicle is shown on the
at even low speeds in wet weather Your vehicle is neither designed
vehicle placard attached to the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- nor intended to be used for
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
plane. Possible resulting loss of trailer towing. Therefore, never
statement “The combined weight
vehicle control can lead to an tow a trailer with your vehicle.
of occupants and cargo should
accident. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
. To maximize the life of each tire on your vehicle’s placard.
and ensure that the tires wear The vehicle placard also shows
uniformly, it is best to rotate the seating capacity of your vehicle.
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). The total load capacity includes the
For information about the tire rota- total weight of driver and all pas-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” sengers and their belongings, any
F11-36. Replace any damaged or cargo, any optional equipment such
unevenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
! Calculating total and load ca- occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
figurations kg).
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
10% of the trailer weight is applied
NOTE
Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)). Your vehicle is neither designed
1. Calculate the total weight. nor intended to be used for
trailer towing. Therefore, never
tow a trailer with your vehicle.
Example 2B NOTE
Your vehicle is neither designed
nor intended to be used for
trailer towing. Therefore, never
tow a trailer with your vehicle.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
For example, if a person weighing (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing maximum load ratings of two front
2. Calculate the available load ca-
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same tires and of two rear tires must
pacity. exceed each axle’s maximum
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 equipment tires are designed to
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the fulfill those conditions.
child to use, the calculations are as The maximum loaded vehicle
follows. weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
1. Calculate the total weight. Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
3. The total weight now exceeds
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
kg), so the cargo weight must be
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
– CONTINUED –
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The GVWR and front and rear . Suspension, bearings, axles and able cargo and luggage load capa-
GAWRs are determined by not only other body parts could break or city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6
the maximum load rating of tires but experience accelerated wear that 150) = 650 lbs)
also loaded capacities of the vehi- will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight
cle’s suspension, axles and other . Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded
parts of the body. . Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not
Therefore, this means that the . Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo
vehicle cannot necessarily be & Steps for Determining Cor- and luggage load capacity calcu-
loaded up to the tire’s maximum rect Load Limit lated in Step 4.
load rating on the tire sidewall. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be
& Adverse safety conse- bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult
quences of overloading on cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this
handling and stopping and pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. reduces the available cargo and
on tires 2. Determine the combined weight luggage load capacity of your ve-
Overloading could affect vehicle of the driver and passengers that hicle.
handling, stopping distance, and will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle and tire performance in the 3. Subtract the combined weight of NOTE
following ways. This could lead to the driver and passengers from Your vehicle is neither designed
an accident and possibly result in XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. nor intended to be used for
severe personal injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the trailer towing. Therefore, never
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and tow a trailer with your vehicle.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam-
loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
rollover. 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
. Stopping distance will increase. five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
. Brakes could overheat and fail. your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of
standards ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear mance.
tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING
traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to
tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight-
in making an informed choice in the government test course. ahead braking traction tests,
purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan-
applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac-
tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics.
mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- depends upon the actual conditions
perature A of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the
The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the
pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of
ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
apply to deep tread, winter type when tested under controlled con-
snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
– CONTINUED –
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
14
14-2 Index
Heater operation (manual climate control system) ............ 4-5 REV...................................................................... 3-28
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-26 Security................................................................. 3-25
High mount stop light................................................. 11-55 Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-26
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-32 Shift-up ................................................................. 3-26
Hill start assist (MT models) ............................... 7-42, 11-29 SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-26
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-23 SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-25
To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-42 Traction control OFF ............................................... 3-23
Warning light ................................................. 3-22, 3-22 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-26
HomeLink® ................................................................ 3-41 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-23
Hook Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-23
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-13 Information display...................................................... 3-29
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-11 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-40
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Horn......................................................................... 3-51 Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-25
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14 iPod® operations ........................................................ 5-37
I J
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-3 Jack and jack handle ................................................... 9-5
Light....................................................................... 3-5 Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-33 Jump starting ............................................................. 9-11
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-2
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-25 K
Indicator light Key............................................................................ 2-2
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-17 Number .................................................................. 2-2
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-26 Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
Cruise control set................................................... 3-27 Replacement........................................................... 2-3
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-27
Headlight .............................................................. 3-27 L
High beam ............................................................ 3-26 Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
Hill start assist OFF................................................ 3-23 License plate light..................................................... 11-53
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-25
Index 14-7
Light Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning
Back-up (4-door) ................................................... 11-51 light) ...................................................................... 3-16
Back-up (5-door) ................................................... 11-52 Manual
Brake/Tail and rear side marker (4-door) .................. 11-51 Climate control system ............................................. 4-3
Cargo area.............................................................. 6-2 Transmission oil ........................................... 11-21, 12-8
Control switch........................................................ 3-31 Transmission-5 speeds ........................................... 7-17
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2 Transmission-6 speeds ........................................... 7-15
Front fog...................................................... 3-36, 11-50 Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-53
Front position ........................................................ 3-32 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-6
High mount stop ................................................... 11-55 Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-48
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-40
License plate ........................................................ 11-53 Moonroof........................................................... 2-29, 9-19
Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-53
Rear combination.................................................. 11-51 N
Trunk................................................................... 11-55 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
Turn signal ......................................... 3-33, 11-50, 11-51
Limited slip differential (LSD) ....................................... 7-30 O
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12 Odometer/Trip meter .................................................... 3-8
Low fuel warning light ......................................... 3-10, 3-22 Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-19 Oil filter ................................................................... 11-11
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-29 Oil level
LSD (Limited slip differential) ....................................... 7-30 Engine ................................................................ 11-10
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-23
M Manual transmission ............................................. 11-21
Main fuse................................................................. 11-46 Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-24
Maintenance Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-18
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Outside
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-48
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-19 Mirrors .................................................................. 3-47
Tools ...................................................................... 9-4 Temperature indicator.............................................. 3-29
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
14-8 Index
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel: & Fuel octane rating:
! Non-turbo models This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3.
(90 RON) or higher.
! Turbo models except STI & Fuel capacity:
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
AKI (95 RON) or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, regular & Engine oil:
unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or Use SUBARU approved motor oil or equivalent.
higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine perfor-
mance and driveability, it is required that you use premium For the details, refer to “Engine oil” F12-5.
grade unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95
RON) or higher. & Engine oil capacity:
! STI 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance & Cold tire pressure:
using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98
RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available Refer to “Tires” F12-11.
in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI
(95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or
driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in
maximum engine performance while using 91 AKI (95 RON)
fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect your warranty
coverage.